sap finance.pdf - Ameerpet Pages

SAP-FI/CO 

SAP: Systems, application and products in data processing 

FI: Financials: co: controlling 

Version: 4.7 EE (Enterprise edition) 

No. of co. working with 4.6b 

4.6c 

SAP Started in 1972 � Head quarters in Germany 

ERP integrated all the function 

ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning 

It facilitate free flow of data among the functions/departments 

ERP Packages: 

SAP, Oracle, financials, peoples soft, BAAN, J. D. Edwards 

1972 – SAP R/1 – Real time data processing 

1980 – SAP R/2 – Included No. of countries and No. of currencies 

1990‟s – SAP R/3 – R/3 Stands for 

Data structure: 

Organization Function 

Purchase Product Sales Finance 

1. Application server 

2. Data base server 

3. Presentation 

1

1999 – My SAP.com – Web based 

2004 – Net weaver - Integrates information, people and processes. 

Areas to be covered under FI/CO 

FI: 

CO: 

1. General ledger accounting 

2. Accounts payable 

3. Account receivable 

4. Asset accounting 

1. Cost element accounting 

2. Cost centre accounting 

3. Internal orders 

4. Profit centre accounting 

5. Product costing 

6. Profitability analysis. 

Integration of 

1. Material Management Module to Financial 

2. Sales & distribution module to financial module integrate 

3. Production planning module to controlling module integration 

4. Data take over 

5. Closing Procedure 

Reports: 

In all the module systems gives around 2000 reports 

You can attach the reports to favorites 

Some important reports you can attach the reports on desk top. 

Cross company code transactions: 

India version: T. D. S, Excise and sales tax. 

Companies Act: Schedule VI: Balance sheet and profit & loss A/C 

2

Basic Settings: 

Production dept 

A 

Fiscal Year: Indian companies � April to March + 4 special periods 

U. S � January to December 

Example: Account year � April 2005 to March 2006 

(12 + 4) 

25/04/06 – Profitability by Account dept – 13 

10/05/06 – Profitability by Management – 14 

05/06/06 – Profitability finalized by Auditors – 15 

Create a project 

Customization with different scenarios 

Testing 

SMB (Small and medium business companies) 

3 

Group 

Company 1 Company 2 Company 3 

Hyd Unit Mumbai Unit Bangalore unit 

Prod dept B 

Serv. dept

How to Open SAP 

Open: Double click on SAP Logon Icon 

Then double click on SAP class 

First screen; 

First field: Client: 2 clients 

1. Development Client 

2. Production Client 

In the Implementation SAP 

1. Consultants 

2. Company Staff (Core Team Members) 

The consultants they do the customization in development client. 

The company staff will do the testing. 

The customization will be transferred to client through transport requests. 

In the production client you enter your day to day transaction. 

Some companies they will give 3 clients 

1. Development client 

2. Testing client 

3. Production client 

Client: 800/000/810 – You can copy and give any number. 

User: Cost of Package will depend on the No. of users Licenses. 

100 Users License - used by 1000 Employees 

It fixes the responsibility on employee. 

User ID: SAP user: You can use small or capital letters (It‟s not case sensitive) 

4

Password: The length of password – Min3 – Max8. 

(It can be Numeric, Alpha Numeric, Alphabets, and special characters. 

Password is not case sensitive 

Not possible to change password more than once in a day. 

Latest 5 passwords can not be used 

Password can not be restored. 

* Money is the password. 

Language: Along with the packages you can get 41 languages. 

If the language not given or EN – Default English 

If you give DE – all fields on screens in German. 

Once you complete press Enter. 

One user can work in Number of sessions at a time (window) 

Maximum is six (6) 

1 st Row is called Menu Bar 

2 nd Row – standard tool bar. 

3 rd Row is called Title bar. 

4 th Row is called Application tool bar 

5- SAP Menu 

Last Row is called Status bar 

√ (Tick) is called Enter. 

Beside Tick there is Box � called command field. 

To open a new session from to Menu bar select systems � Create session. 

To move from one session to another session 

5

Use Alt + Tab 

To close the session the path is from Menu Bar Systems � End session 

How to use Transaction codes (TC) 

Standard codes one common in all over the world 

To go back to SAP easy access screen 

Example: 

Use /N in command field and press enter 

For posting of Transaction: 

F-02 Account display 

(FS10N) 

/N is command field and press enter � Easy Access 

Use FS10N in command field – you can directly enter into Accounts display 

/N FS10N – change session with new transaction code. 

/o FS10N – create session with new transaction code. 

How to close the system: 

*From the Menu bar select system Log off. 

Select yes button to Log off 

Go through the path 

Posting of document 

(2 ways) 

6 

Use transaction code in 

Command field and press 

enter

How to unlock screens: 

*Tools � Administration � Monitor � Lock Entries (Transaction code is /NSM12) 

Select list button 

From the Menu bar select Lock entry delete all. 

Press yes button to delete all lock entries. 

How to activate Transaction codes 

Path: From the Menu select extras � setting � Display Technical Name (check) Box � 

Enter 

Set start Transaction You can make screen as default screen 

How to set start transaction: 

From the Menu select extras set start transaction 

Give the transaction code „f-02‟ (start Transaction) 

Press enter 

Creation of project 

Group � Companies � Units 

In SAP – Group is called as company 

Company is called as company code. 

Unit is called as Business areas. 

Group--> Aravind group 

Aravind Mills Ltd (AML companies Ltd) () Aravind Steels Ltd 

(ASL) 

Hyd 

Mumbai Bangalore 

Hyd 

Mumbai Bangalore 

.The consultant does customization at company code level 

7 

Aravind Chemicals 

(ACL) 

Hyd Mumbai Bangalore

The company or group is only for information. 

Define Company: 

Path; SPRO � Enterprises Structure � Definition � Financial 

Accounts�Define Company. (T.CODE-/NOX15) 

The company or Groups is only for Information 

This is called customization area (or) configuration area (or) Implementation area. 

1 st button is called IMG documentation (Description path about Company) 

2 nd button is called IMG activity. 

If you want to customization select IMG Activity. 

Double click on IMG Activity Button 

Select New Entries Button. 

Enter company name AVG (optional) 

Company name is Aravind group 

Name of the Company2 � if groups has any second Name 

Street � Ameerpet 

Postal Code � 500 000 

City � Hyderabad 

Country � one button is called drop down button or pull down button 

For country select drop down button � 236 Countries 

Select IN � for India. 

Language key: select drop down button � 41 languages 

8

Select EN for English 

Currency: select the drop down button – 183 Currencies. 

Select INR – Indian Rupee. 

Select Save button or (ctrl + s) 

Before saving, the screen gives you latest transport request 

Select create request button (F8) 

Short description - FI Basic settings for Aravind Mills Ltd 

Press enter � Press Enter once again to saving the request. 

You can see the system data saved. 

It can saved in client 800 AML Company 

Define Company code: 

Tools � Customizing � IMG� Edit Project � SAP reference IMG button� 

(SPRO) � Enterprises structure � definition � Financial Accounting � Edit, 

copy, delete, check company code. (T.CODE-/NOX02) 

Double click on IMG Activity button. 

Double click on Edit company code data 

Select new entries button. 

Company code � AML (Max 4 characters) 

Company Name � Aravind Mills Ltd 

City � Hyd 

Country � IN 

Currency � INR 

Language � EN 

9

Once you can complete the data, select save button or (ctrl + s). 

It gives a big screen 

Title: Company 

Name: Aravind Mills Ltd. 

Address: Street � Ameerpet 

Postal code � 500 000 

City � Hyd 

Country � IN 

Once you complete press Enter 

You can enter it gives you latest request 

To choose your request � select drop down button beside 

Requests number � it gives the entire request. 

Select your request number � press Enter to save in the request. 

It saved in two places 

1. Client 800 

2. Request 

Assign company code to company: (T.CODE-/NOX16) 

Path is SPRO � Enterprise structure � Assignment � Financial Accounting � 

Assign company code to company. 

Double click on IMG Activity button. 

Shortcut: 

Select position button � Give you company code AML press Enter. 

For company code (AML) Assign Company (AVG) select save button or (ctrl + s) 

Press Enter to save your request. 

10

Define Business Areas: (T.CODE-/NOX03) 

Business Areas assignment to company code is not required. 

The same Business area can be used by any company code. 

Path: SPRO � Enterprises structure � definition � financial accounting � define 

business area 

Double click on IMG Activity button 


Code May be numerical or Characters – Max 4 

Code: AMH � Hyderabad business Area. 

AMB � Bangalore Business Area 

AMM � Mumbai Business Area 

Select save button or (ctrl + s) 

Select drop Box. 

Press enter to save in your request. 

Chart of Accounts: 

1. Common set of Accounts � accounting coding should be same, and then only you can 

compare and consolidate between company code or business areas. 

2. Separate set of Accounts: 

3. Group chart of Accounts: 

In this case you have to give 2 No (Company code Number + Group code 

Number) 

*Companies they follow common set of Accounts 

Chart of Accounts name 

Description 

Maintenance language 

11

Length of the Account Number � Max 10 digits 

But companies are normally using 6 digits. 

Path of chart of Accounts 

SPRO � Financial Accounting � General Ledger Accounting 

G/L Accounts � Master Records � Preparation � Edit chart of Accounts list 

Double click on IMG Activity button (T.Code OB13) 

From the Menu select system status � short cut 

Select New Entries button 

Chart of Accounts ---> AML (Max 4 characters) 

Description � Chart of Accounts for Aravind Group 

Maintenance Language --> Select English 

Length of G/L Account no: enter 6 

Controlling integration � Select Manual creation of cost element 

Group chart of Accounts � Blank 

Under status � Blocked � Deselect Blocked Check Box 

Use of Block is to avoid duplicate Accounts creation. 

Once you complete you can select save button 

Press Enter to save in your request. 

Assign Company Code to chart of Accounts: 

Path: SPRO �Financial Accounting � General Ledger Account�G/L Accounts � 

Master Records � Preparations � Assign company code to chart of Accounts. (T. code 

OB62) 

Select Position Button 

Give the Company code AML � press Enter. 

12

For the company code AML assign chart of accounts AML 

Select save button or (ctrl + s) button 

Press Enter to save your request. 

Account Groups: 

1. Liabilities - 1.series 

2. Assets - 2.series 

3. Income- 3.series 

4. Expenditure- 4.series 

Path: SPRO � SAP Ref IMG � Financial Accounting � General Ledger Accounting 

� G/L Accounts � Master Records � Preparations � Define Account Group 

(Transaction code OBD4) 

Select New Entries button. 

Chart of Accounts: 

Give the chart of Accounts --> AML 

Chart of Account Name 

From Account To Account 

accounts group 

AML SCPL Share Capital 100000 100099 

AML RSPL Reserves & 

Surplus 

100100 100199 

AML ACDN Accumulated 

depreciation 

100200 100299 

AML SCLN Secured Loans 100300 100399 

AML UNSL Unsecured Loans 100400 100499 

AML CLPR Current liabilities 

&provisions 

100500 100599 

AML FAST Fixed assets 200000 200099 

AML CAST Current Assets, 

Loans and 

advance 

200100 200199 

AML SALE Sales 300000 300099 

AML OTHR Other Income 300100 300199 

AML INCR Increase/Decrease 

in stocks 

300200 300299 

AML RMCN Raw Material 

consumption 

400000 400099 

AML PRSN Personnel Cost 

(Staff cost) 

400100 400199 

13

AML MFRG Manufacturing 400200 400299 

AML ADMN Administration 400300 400399 

AML INTR Interest 400400 400499 

AML DEPR Depreciation 400500 400599 

Once you complete select save button or (ctrl +s) save in your request. 

Retained Earnings Account: 

Year Ending 

P&L Account Balance � Surplus in P&L A/Cs transfer to Reserves & Surplus. 

Balance sheet Account balance � carry forwards to next year � Opening Balance for 

next year. 

Assign one Account for retained earnings � 100100. 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � General Ledger Accounting � G/L Accounts 

� Master Records � Preparations � Define Retained Earnings Accounts. (T. Code 

OB53 

Give your chart of Accounts AML 

Press Enter. 

P&L Statements Accounts Type Account 

X 100100 

Select save button or (ctrl + s) 

It gives the Message, Account 100100 not created in chart of Accounts AML 

Ignore the message press Enter. Press Enter once again to save in your request. 

Fiscal Year 

14

Indian Company – Apr to March + 4 Special Periods –V3 

U.S.Company - Jan to Dec + 4 Special Periods -K4 

How to convert Calendar your Periods to Accounting your periods 

Path: SPRO�. Financial Accounting � Financial Accounting Global settings � fiscal 

year � Maintain fiscal year variant (Maintain shortened fiscal year) (T. Code OB29) 

Select position button 

Give fiscal year variant –V3 

Enter 

Select fiscal year variant – V3 

Double click on period‟s folder 

Select back arrow (or) F3 

Select new entries button 

Fiscal variant � Give A3 - Max 2 characters 

Description � April – March + 4 special periods 

Deselect- year dependant check Box 

Deselect calendar year check Box 

No. of posting periods 12 

No. of special periods 4 

Once you complete select save button (or) (ctrl +s) 

Save in your request 

Select fiscal year variant: A3 

Double click on period‟s folder 


15

Conversion table: 

Month Days Period Year shift 

January (1) 31 10 -1 

February (2) 29 11 -1 

March (3) 31 12 -1 

April (4) 30 1 0 

May (5) 31 2 0 

June (6) 30 3 0 

July (7) 31 4 0 

August (8) 31 5 0 

September(9) 30 6 0 

October (10) 31 7 0 

November (11) 30 8 0 

December (12) 31 9 0 

Once you complete select save button or (ctrl + s) 

Assign company code to a fiscal year variant 

SPRO � Financial Accounting � Global Settings � Fiscal Year � Assign Company 

Code to a fiscal year variant (T.Code is OB37) 

Select position Button 

Ignore the Message press Enter 

Give your Company Code AML 

Press Enter 

For company code AML, Assign Fiscal Year variant V3 (or) A3 

Select save button (or) (ctrl + s) 

Ignore the Warning Message Press Enter 

Press Enter to save in your request. 

Document Types and No. Ranges 

Stores (factory) Sales (Depot) Accounts(City 

office) 

RE RV SA Document type 

03 02 01 Number Range 

200001 To 300000 100001 To 200000 1 To 100000 Number Range 

16

17 

Intervals 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Financial Accounting Global Settings � 

Document � Document Header � Define document types. (T. Code OBA7). 

Select position Button 

Give the document type SA. 

Press Enter. 

Select Type: SA 

Select details button 

Note down to No. Range 01 

Select No. Range Information button. 

Give your company code AML 

Screen Shows: 

Intervals � It show what no. we are give 

Status � Change status � how many documents we have posted. 

Intervals � Change intervals � to give document Number. 

Select change Intervals button. 

Select Intervals button. 

Give the Number Range – 01. 

Year – 2006 

From Number1 to Number 100000 

Current Number – 0 

Deselect External check box. 

Press Enter 

Select save button. 

Number range intervals can not be transferred to production client. 

Ignore the message. Press Enter. 

SAP also gives voucher numbers in two ways. 

Example: 

Scenario: - I 

01 2006 1 – 100000

01 2007 1 – 100000 

01 2008 1 - 100000 

Same session for each year. 

Scenario: -II 

01 9999 (Any year) (We do not know how 

many document we have 

posted in each year) 

Note: Companies normally follows Scenario I. 

Field status variant & field status groups 

At the time of entry the system gives 70 fields. 

Examples: Quantity, text, business area, value date. 

(Around 140 fields to use, all the fields are (70 debits + 70 credits). 

You can make any field as 

1. Surplus field – Field will not be visible. 

2. Required field – To enter the values. 

3. Optional field – Choice to enter or not enter. 

Entry lay out based on field‟s selection in the field status group which is assigned to G/L 

Account. 

Field Status group one Created under field status variants and field status variant is 

assigned to company code: 

Example: Cash A/C Dr 

To Share Capital A/C 

Equity share capital 

(General) 

Text & Business area Required fields 

Cash Account Text & Business area Required fields 

Bank Account Text & Business area & 

Value date 

Required fields 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Financial Accounting Global settings � 

document � Line Item � Controls � Maintain field status variants. 

18

Select field status 1000 

Select copy as button 

Change the field status variant AML 

Field status name: 

Field status variant for AML 

Press Enter 

Select copy all button. 

No. of dependent entries copied 45. 

Enter. 

Select save button (or) (ctrl + s). 


Select field status variant AML 

Double click field status group folder 

Select G001 – General and double click on General data. 

Text make it required entry field. 

Select next group button. 

Select next page or page down button. 

Select required entry for business area. 


Select 005 Bank Accounts and double click. 

Double click on general data. 

Text field make it required entry field. 

Select new group button. 

Select next page (or) page down button. 

Business area make it required entry field. 

19

Select next group button 2 times. 

Value date make it required entry field. 

Press save button 

Assign company code to field status variant: 


document � Line item � controls � Assign company code to field status variants. 

Select position button. 

Give your company code AML. 

Enter. 

For company code AML, Assign field status variant AML 

Save, save in your request. 

Posting periods: 

a. Define posting period variant. 

b. Assign posting periods to company code. 

c. Define open and close periods for variant. 

April, 2006 to March 2007 � Fiscal year 2006 

If company is completed quarterly results 

July 2006 to March 2007 

(4, 2006) to (12, 2006) 

Define posting period variant: 

Path: SPRO � financial accounting � financial accounting Global settings � 

document � posting periods � define variants open posting periods. 


Give the variant AML. 

Give the name � posting period variant for AML. 

20



Assign variants to company code: 


document � posting periods � Assign variants to Company code. 

Select position button. 

Give your company code AML. 

Press Enter. 

For Company code AML – Assign variant AML. 


Define open and close posting periods: 


document � Posting periods � Open and close posting periods. 

Select New Entries button. 

Select variant AML. 

A – for Account Type. 

Select + variant for all accounts type 

From Account – Blank 

To Account – Blank. 

From period 1 is = 4 (July) 

Year is 2005. 

To period is = 12 (March) 

21

Year is 2006. 

If Audit is not over (March 2006 to March to 2006) 

(13, 2005) (13, 2005) 

From period 13 (special Period) – Year 2005 

To Period 13 (Special Period) –Year 2005 

Authorization Group: 

Authorization will give to some persons like Manager (Accounts) –ID, 

Dy. Managers (Accounts) – ID at user level. 

Once you complete select save button (or) (ctrl + s). 

Press enter to save in your request. 

Path for posting periods at user level: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Environment current 

setting � Open and close posting periods (T. Code is S _ALR _ 87003642). 

How to give the transaction code when you get SPRO 

Path: SPRO � from the Menu select additional information, once again additional 

function � display key � IMG activity. 

Note down the last 4 (OBBO) (OB52) (OBBP). 

OB52 (is open and closing periods). 

Open Item Management 

Tolerance groups for G/L Accounts 

(2 types) 

G/L Accounts 

(Tolerance Group) 

Used for vendors/customers/Balance sheet Accounts where clearing is required 

22 

Employee 

(Tolerance Group)

Out standing expenses A/C 

Salaries 1,00,000 

Bank cash 15,000 Wages 1,00,000 

Rent 15,000 

We can see the items in three ways: 

1. Open Item: We can see only outstanding – Payable Item. 

2. Cleared: We can see only cleared Item – Paid Item. 

3. All: We can see all items included Paid/Payable Items. 

Tolerance Group: 

Amount Percentage 

A 1000 0% 

B 0 5% 

C 

If you commission is payable 100020� only paid 100000 the remaining balance 

(20/-) may be transferred to payment difference Account (or) payable (Partial payment). 

Disadvantages: 

a. It given at account level and not at transaction level 

b. No flexibility. 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � General Ledger Accounting � Business 

transactions � Open item clearing � clearing differences � define Tolerance group for 

G/L Accounts. 


Company code: AML 

Tolerance group: Blank. 

Name of tolerance group: Tolerance group for AML. 

Debit amount – 0 

Credit amount – 0 

Percentage of debit – 0 

Percentage of credit – 0 

23

Deselect value date (VD) check box 



Value date (effective date) 

If I received term loan from I.D.B.I on 15/07/06 

If I deposited in Bank on 17/07/06 

Document date: 17/07/06 

Posted date: 17/07/06 

*Value date: 15/07/06 �(effective date) 

Tolerance group for employees 

Here we give user wise upper limits for posting 

Amount per document 

Amount per open item Account item 

Open item: Vendors/customers. 

Cash discount 

Payments difference we can accept. 

*Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � General Ledger Accounting � business 

transactions � Open item clearing � clearing differences � 


Group Blank 

24

Company Code � AML 

Amount document – 9999999999 

Amount for open item account item – 9999999999 

Cash discount per line item: 10% 

Permitted payment differences: Blank 

Select save button or save button 

Press enter to save your request. 

Calculation procedure 

Basic xxx 

+ Excise xxx 

xxx 

Sales Tax 

Sales Tax on (Basic + Excise) 

It is temporary assignment G/L Accounts 

In � Tax Us (Sales Tax USA) 

IN � Tax Ind (Sales Tax India) 

| 

Tax US 

IN is assigned to company code AML 

25

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Financial Accounting Global Setting � Tax on 

sales or purchases � Basic settings � Assign country to calculation procedure. 


Give the country IN for India 

Enter 

For country IN Assign Tax US (Sales Tax USA) 

Save. Press enter to save in your request. 

Global Parameters 

1. Enter Global Parameters; 


Company code � Enter Global parameters. 



Press Enter 

Select company code AML 


Select Business area financial statements check box 

Select propose fiscal year check box 

Select Define default value date check box 

Select negative posting allowed check box 

When you reverse a document it reduces from the same side. 

Ex: - Cash A/C Dr 500000 

To Equity share capital 500000 

And another posting for 300000 

26

Periods 

1 

2 

Debit 

Credit 

Balance for the month 

balance 

3 

4 (July) 800000 800000 800000 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

27 

Cumulative 

If the 2 nd Entry 300000 is wrongly entered in equity share capital – Actual entry 

in preference share capital. 

Reversal A/C 

1. Equity share capital A/C Dr 300000 

To Cash A/C 300000 

2. Cash A/C Dr 300000 

To preference Share capital 300000 

(Or) 

Rectification Entry 

Equity share capital A/C 300000 

To Preference share capital A/C 300000 

Then the Equity Share Capital Summary is

Periods 

1 

2 

3 

Debit 

Credit 

Balance for the Month 

28 

Cumulative balance 

4(July) 300000 500000 500000 500000 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

Select additional details button 

49A – PAN (Permanent Account No) 

49B – TDS No (Tax deduction of source) 

PAN & TDS Number given at company code level 

TDS No. AP 945678906 

PAN No. AP 7890000 A 

Select back arrow and save 


General ledger master creation (G/L Masters) 

G/L Masters created at 

Field Year: 

Chart of Accounts Area Company Code Area Centrally

G/L Account No. 

Account group 

P&L A/C (or) B/S A/C 

Short Text 

Long Text 

Account Currency 

Tolerance group 

Open item management 

Line item display 

Short Key 

Field status group 

To check Account groups for giving Account no.s 

29 

It having both charts of 

Account fields + company 

code Area fields. 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � General Ledger Accounting � G/L Accounts 

� Master Records � Preparations � Define account group (T.Code OBD4) 


Give your chart of accounts AML 

Enter 

Reserves & Surplus - 100100 to 100199 

Equity share capitals - 100000 to 100099 

Current Assets - 200100 to 200199 

Creation of G/L Master (user levels) 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Master records � 

Individual processing � Centrally (T. Code FS00) 

Give the G/L Account No: 100100

Company code AML 

From the Menu select G/L Account create 

Select the Account group: Reserves & Surplus 

Select Balance Sheet A/C Radio button 

Short Text – Surplus in P/L Account 

G/L Account Log Text – Surplus in Profit and Loss A/C 

Select Control data Tab 

Select only balances in currency check box 

Tolerance group � Blank 

Select Line Item display check box 

Note: All Accounts give line item display check box. 

Sort key � Select 001 posting date 

Select create/bank/interest tab 

Field status group � Select 001 General 


2. One more G/L Account – FS00 

Give the G/L Account no: 100000 


30

Select with Template button 

Give G/L Account No. 100100 


Press Enter 

Select the Account Group: Share Capital 

Change the Short text to equity share capital 

Change the G/L Account long text equity share capital 

Other fields are common 


Give the G/L Account No. 200100 


Select with Template button (w-Template) 

Give the G/L Account no. 100100 (Reserves & Surplus) 


Press Enter 

Change the Account group to Current Assets & Loans and Advances 

Change short text to cash account 

Change G/L Account log text to cash account 

Select create/bank/Interest tab 

Change the field status group G005 (Bank Accounts) 

Select relevant to cash flow check box 


To give the list of Accounts created 

Select drop button beside G/L Account No. (Or) (T. code OBD4) 

31

The screen is called as Match code. 

Give the company code AML 

Enter 

It gives the what Accounts that are created. 

Posting of Transactions 

Path: Accounting� Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Document entry � 

General posting (F-02) 

Document date: Party bill date � F4 – Calendar. 

F2 - Selection of date. 

Posting date : Server date, Ledger updating based on posting date period comes 

automatically. 

Ref – Party Bill No 

Document No: 

Type: SA 


Currency – INR 

To differentiate between debit and credit 

You are using posting key 

Posting key (PST Key) 

40 – G/L Account debit 

50 – G/L Account credit 

Select posting key: 40 

The next field is account: 

Select A/C No: 200100 

32

Press Enter 

Give the amount 100000 

The fields are come on the basis of selection of Field Status Group 

Business Area: AMH (Hyderabad Business area) 

Text enter: Equity share capital receipt 

Select posting key: Select 50 

For Account: Select the drop down button 

Give the company code AML 

And press Enter 

Select Account No: 100000 (Equity Share Capital) 

Press Enter 

You can make Enter amount manually i.e. 100000 (or) 

Enter * (* makes debit and credit equal) 

Business area: AMH 

Text: Enter (+) (plus): Copying the latest line item narration (or) make manually 

Press Enter 

From the menu select document� simulate 

In once document you can post up to 999 line item in a document 

Debit will be with out sign 

Credit will be with Minus (-) sign 

Once you complete select save button or (ctrl + s) 

It gives the message document „1‟ was posted in company code AML. 

How to view the latest document 

33

From the menu select document display 

Select display document header button (F5). 

Change document 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting� General Ledger � Document � Change 

(Transaction code FB02) 

Press Enter 

Double click on 1 st line item 

Enter 

We can change only value date, assignment and text 

How to view the documents: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � General Ledger � Document � Display 

(Transaction code (FB03) 

Select document list button 

Give your company code: AML 

Give the document type: SA 

To give the posting date: From and to (Specific date) 

To view the document posted by a particular user 

From the menu select edit dynamic selections (shift + F4) 

Give the user name: SAP user 

Select execute button (F8) 

Double click on document No.1 

It shows the document 

Display Ledger 

34

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting� General Ledger � Account � Display 

Balance (Transaction code FS10N) 

To give multiple Accounts – Select right arrow beside G/L Account 

To view continuous number select ranges tab with green pound symbol 

To exclude any account select singly values tab with ‘Red’ 

Pound symbol 

Green – Inclusion 

Red – Exclusion 

Once you complete select copy button 

To give singly Account � Select drop don button beside G/L Account 


Press Enter 

Select your account number 100000 – Equity share capital 


Fiscal year 2006 

Business Area, select AMH 

Select execute button (F8) 

Double click on Cumulative balance amount 

Double click on document No. 1 

Select call up document over view button 

Select back arrow 

35

How to create own line layout: 

Select change layout button 

Select the fields which one not required under column content 

Document no, Amount, Text not select 

Select right arrow (or) Hide selected field‟s button 

For the hidden fields column select posting date, 

Select left arrow (or) show selected field‟s button. 

Change the column positions: 

Document N0. Should be one (1) 

Posting date should be two (2) 

Text should be three (3) 

Amount in local currency (4) 

Text column length change to 35 

For amount in local currency – Select total check box 

Select copy button. 

How to save the layout 

2 Lay notes 

1. User specific 

2. Common to All. 

User specific: It can be saved with any number or name. 

Common to all: It should be saved with/any number or name 

Select save lay out button (ctrl + F12) 

Lay out: /AML 

Description: Standard layout for AML 


36

How to choose your layout 

From the Menu select select lay out button 

Select /AML 

How to make default layout 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Environment � User 

parameters � Editing options (T. Code FB00) 

Select Line Items Tab. 

For default select on screen under G/L Account layout 

Select /AML 

Select save button 

Go and see the G/L Account � Path FS10N 

Select G/L Account No. 200100 (cash account) 


Fiscal year 2006 

Business area - AMH 

Select execute button (or) F8 

Double click on cumulative balance 

Accrual/deferred document 

a. Creation of 3 G/L Accounts 

i) Salaries A/C – Personnel cost 

ii) Rent A/C – Administration 

iii) Outstanding expenses – Current liabilities & provisions 

b) Define reversal reason and reversal reason should allow us to reverse on any day. 

c) Creation of accrual/deferred document 

One provision is today date and one for month ending date. 

24/07/06 - Rent 

37

31/07/06 - Salaries 

d. Reversal of accrual/Deferred documents 

Creation 3 G/L Accounts: 

In this case first to check Accounts groups for giving Account group 

Give the Transaction Code OBD4 


Give the chart of Accounts AML � Enter. 

Note down personnel cost range � 400400 to 400199 

Note down the range for administration� 400300 to 400399 

Note down the range for current Liabilities & provisions � 100500 to 100599 

Creation of G/L Masters (FS00) 

Give G/L Account No. 400100 


Select with template button 

Give G/L Account No: 100000 (Equity share capital) 


Press Enter. 

Change the account group to personnel cost 

Select P&L Statement Account Radio Button 

Change short text to salaries account. 

Change G/L Account Long Text to Salaries Account 

Other fields are common. 


38

2. G/L Account No: 400300 



Give G/L Account No: 400100 (salaries A/C) 

Enter. 

Change the Account group to administration. 

Change the short text: Change to Rent Account 

G/L Account long text: Change to Rent Account 

Save. 

3. G/L Account No. 100500 

Company code: AML. 

Select with template button. 

Give G/L Account No: 100000 (Equity share capital) 

Company code AML � Enter. 

Change the A/C group to current liabilities & provisions 

Change short text & long text to outstanding expenses. 

Select control data tab. 

Select open item management check box. 

Save. 

39

Reversal Entries 

Define: Reversal reason and reversal reason should allow is to reverse on any day. 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � General ledger accounting � Business 

Transactions � Adjustment posting/Reversal � Define reasons for reversal 

(T. code: FBS1) 


Reason is 41 (Text field). 

Give the text accrual/deferral document. 

Give the document date: 28.07.06 

Type: SA 

Company Code: AML. 

Reversal reason: 41. 

Reversal date: 01.08.2006. 

Posting Key: 40 

A/C No: 400300 (Rent Account). 

Enter. 

Give the amount Rs. 10000/- 

Business area – AMH 

Text: Rent provision for July. 


Account No: 100500 (Outstanding expenses) 

Enter. 

40

Amount: „*‟. 

Business Area: AMH. 

Text: „+‟ 

Document � Simulate and save. 

Same Path: FBS1. 

Salary Provision 

Give the document date and posting date: 31.07.06. 

Type: SA. 


Reversal reason: 41. 


A/C No: 400100 (Salaries Account), Enter. 

Ignore the warning message, Press Enter. 

Give the amount Rs.200000. 


Text: Salary provision for July. 


A/C No. 100500 (Out standing expenses). 

Enter. 

Amount: „*‟ 


Text: „+‟ 


41

Reversal Accrual/Referral document 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Periodic process � 

Closing � Valuate � Reversal accrual referral � Document. 

Transaction Code: F 81 

Give the company code: AML. 

Give the reversal posting date: 01.08.2006. 

Select text new check box. 

Select execute documents button. 

Select reverse documents button. 

Open item management 

Vendor Accounts 

Customers Accounts 

Balance sheets Accounts where clearing required. 

Provision – payment – outstanding expenses 

Recovery – payment – PF, TDS 

In G/L Masters we have to select open items management check II (Refer 

Tolerance Group) 

3 Scenarios: 

Full clearing – Partial clearing – Residual clearing 

Provision Payment - Partial clearing – Residual clearing 

42

1. Full Clearing Scenario: 

1. Rent Provision: User transaction code: F-02 


Type SA: Company code: AML: Posting key: 40 

Account No: 400300 (Rent Account) 

Enter. 

Amount is 5555 


Rent provision for July. 


A/C No: 100500 (Outstanding expenses) 

Enter. 



Text: „+‟ 


2. How to view open item repaid A/C 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Account display/check 

line items (T. Code: FBL3N) 

Give the G/L Account No. 100500 (outstanding expenses). 

43


Select open items radio button. 

Select execute button. 

3. Outgoing payment with clearing: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Document entry � out 

going Payment (T. Code: F -07) 

Give document date: 28.07.2006. 

Type: SA. 


Clearing Text: Out going payment 

Account under bank data: 200100 Cash A/C. 


Amount: 5555. 

Text: Out going payment. 

Account under open item selection: 100500 (Outstanding expenses). 

Account Type: „S‟ comes by default. 

„S‟ stands for G/L Accounting. 

Select process open items button. 

Double click on 5555 payable. 

Documents simulate and save. 

4. Go and see the G/L Account (FBL3N) 

Give G/L Account No: 100500. 

44


Select cleared items radio button. 

Execute. 

Select back arrow. 

Select open items radios button. 

Execute. 

Partial clearing – Net payable 

To check what steps you have done in your reverse. 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting Global Settings � Company code � Enter 

Global Parameters. 

Select your company code: AML. 

Select details button. 

From the menu select utilities. 

Change reverses (customization) 

Select the folder for your reverse no. 

Select sub folder customizing table. 

Partial clearing Method: 

Vendors/Customers - 

1. Rent provision F-02): 

Document date: 31-07-2006. 

Type: SA. 


Reference Bill No. 1234. 


Account No: 400300 (Rent Account). 

Enter. 

Amount: 50000. 


45

Text: Rent provision for July 


Account No. 100500 (Outstanding expenses) 

Enter 


Business Area: AMH 

Text: „+‟ 

Document � Simulate & Save. 

Out going payment using partial clearing method 

Transaction code: F -07 

Document date: 31-07-06 

Type: SA 


Reference: 1234 

Clearing Text: Out going payment 

Account: 200100 (Cash/Bank Accounts) 


Amount: 15,000 

Text: Out going payment 

Account: Under open item selection 

100500 (Outstanding Expenses) 

Account type: S comes by default 

Select process open items button 

Keep the cursor the amount fields of the line items against which we want adjust 

Select Partial payment tab 

It creates payment amount column 

46

Double click on Net amount 50000 

Double click on payment amount 50000 

Document simulate 

It gives the message correct the marked line item 

Double click on blue font line item 

Text Enter „+‟ 

Save (or) (ctrl +s) 

Go and see the G/L Accounts (FBL3N) 

Give the G/L Account No: 100500 

Company Code: AML 

Select open items radio button 

Execute 

Select change layout button 

From the hidden fields column select reference field 

Select “Text” field under column content 

Select left arrow (or) show selected fields‟ button 

Select copy button 

Keep the cursor on reference field 

Select sub total button 

Making the balance payment and clearing the account 

(Transaction code F-07) 



Reference: 1234 

Clearing text: Out going payment 

47

Account No: Under Bank data: 200100 


Amount: 35000 


Account: Under open item selection – 100500 (Outstanding expenses) 

Account type: „S‟ comes by default 


Double click on payable Amount 50000 

Double click on part paid amount: 15000 

Documents simulate and save 

Go and see the G/L Account: (FBL3N) 

Give G/L Account No: 100500 


Select clear items radio button 

Execute 

Residual Payment (Residual clearing) 

1. Rent Provision (F-02) 


Type: SA 



Account No: 400300 (Rent account) 

Enter 

Amount: 60000 


Text: Rent provision for July 


48

Account No: 100500 (Outstanding expenses) 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 

Document � Simulate & save 

Outgoing payment using residual clearing method 

User Transaction code F-07 (Payable amount) 


Type: SA 



Account under bank date: 200100 (Cash Account) 


Amount: 20000 


Account: Under open item selection: 100500 

Account type: „S‟ default 


Keep the cursor on the amount field of the line item on 

Which we want to adjust 

Select residual items tab 

49

It creates residual items column 

Double click on Net amount 60000 

Double click on residual items 


It gives the message correct the marked line item 

Double click on blue font line item 

Text enter „+‟ 

Save (or) (ctrl + s) 

Go and see the G/L Accounts (FBL3N) 

Give the G/L Account No: 100500 (Out standing Expenses) 



Execute 

Check exchange rate types; 

Foreign currency postings: 

Bank buying – Export – G Type 

Bank Setting – Imports/Expenditure – B Type 

Average Rate: Used by MM/SD People – M Type 

Path: SPRO � General settings � Currencies � Check exchange rate types. 

Select types 


Enter „B‟ 

Enter 

Define transaction ratios for currency transaction 

50

Path: SPRO � General settings � Currencies � Define translation radio for currency 

translation. 

This defines the conversion factory between two currencies. 

year. 

USD INR 

1 1 

Japanese year INR 

100 1 

Europe INR 

1 1 

Once we follow one conversion factory, follow continuously the same for all the 

This is at client level 

Double click on IMG Activity button 

Ignore the message select “yes” button 


Ext rt: (Exchange rate type) 

Select „G‟ – Bank buying 

From: Select USD (American Dollar) 

To: Select INR 

Valid from: 10-07-2006 

Ration (From) – 1 

Radio (To) – 1 

Exchange rate: Select B (Bank setting) 

From: USD 

To: INR 

51

Valid from: 10-07-2006 

From ratio – 1 

To ration - 1 

Exchange rate: Select M (Average) 

From currency: USD 

To currency: INR 

Valid from: 10.07.2006 

Ratio from – 1 

Ratio to – 1 



Enter exchange rates: 

Path: SPRO � General settings � Currencies � Enter exchange rates 


Exchange rate type: G (Bank buying) 

Valid date: 25-07-2006 

From Currency: USD 

To select: INR 

Direct quotation: 44/- 

Enter 

Exchange rate type: Select B 

Valid date: 25-07-2006 




Exchange rate type: M 

52

Valid from: 25-07-2006 




Save 


You can enter each type for each day only 

Path for forex rates at user level 

Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Environment � 

Current settings � Events translation rates (S_BCE_68000174) 

When the rate is not given: 

It takes the rates from forex table 

It takes the latest date rate 

To enter default exchange rate 

Type based on document type 

G/L Posting – SA � b (Bank selling) 

Purchase invoice posting � G (Bank buying) 

(If we don‟t specify it takes „M‟ type by default. „M Average rate‟ 

To enter default exchange rate type „B‟ (Bank selling) for document type – „SA‟ 

(Use the transaction code (OBA7). 


Give the document type „SA‟ 

Postings 

When the rate is not given When the rate is given 

53

Enter 

Select document type „SA‟. 


Under default values exchange rate type for foreign currency documents 

Enter B 



Foreign Currency Posting (F-02) 

Document date 02-08-2006 

Type: SA 


Currency: USD 

Posting key: 40 

Give account No. 400100 (Salaries account) 

Enter 

Give the amount 1000$ 


Text: Salary payment 

Enter 


Account No. 200100 (Cash account) 

54

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 

Document �Simulate 

To view in INR � Select display currency button. 


When the rate is given at the time of posting 

Use the transaction code (F-02) 

Give the document date: 02-08-2006 

Type: SA 


Currency: USD 

Give the rate: 48/- 


Account: 400100 (Salaries Account) 

Enter 

It gives message 

Exchange rate: 48$ deviate the increase 4.38% 

Ignore message and Enter 

Give the amount: 1000$ 

55


Text: Salary payment 

Press: Enter 


Give the account no: 200100 (Cash account) 

Enter 

Amount: *. 


Text: + 

Documents � Simulate & save. 

Reversals 

| | | | | 

Individual Reversal of Mass Cleared Accrual/deferral 

Document reverse Reversal items reversal 

Reversal document reversal 

Individual document reversal 

This is used to reversal one document at a time 

To give reversal reason 

If we don‟t specify reversal date, it takes original document posting date 

That period should be open. 

Path: Accounting� Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Document � Reverse 

� Individual reversal (FB08) 

Give the document No: 1 


Fiscal year: 2006 

Reversal reason: 

56

Select 01 (reversal in current period) 

Posting date: Blank 

Select display before reversal button 



From the menu select „document display‟ 

Select display document header button 

Double click on 1 (Reverse document for) 


SA – Original document list 

AB – reversal document list 

Details button 

No range – 01 

FB03 – Document display 


Document type: SA – Original document 

AB – Reversal document 

(System defined) 

Reversal of reverse document 

Use the transaction code (F-02) 

From the menu select document Post with reference 

Give the document No. 15 



57

Select generate reverse posting check box 

Select display line items check box 

Enter 

Enter once again 

Change Text: Reversal for document No. 15 

Enter 

Text: „+‟ 

Enter: Save (or) (ctrl + s). 

Enter 



Mass Reversal 

To reverse more than one document at a time, we use mass reversal; it can be 

continuous or random. 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Document � Reverse 

� Mass reversal (F-80) 

Give the company code: AML 

To reverse random Numbers � Select multiple selection 

Beside document number 

Give the document No. 2 & 4 


Give the reason for reversal „01‟ 

Select text run check box 

Select execute button 

58

Instead of 2 and 4, Give document No: 13 & 16 

If documents are O.K 

Select reverse document button 

Clear item reversal 

Use the transaction code: (FBL3N) 

Give the G/L Account No: 100500 (Outstanding expenses) 


Select cleared items button 

Execute 

Full cleared items 

Out standing expenses 

Cash/Bank 5555 Document N0 – Rent A/C 5555 

(7) (6) 

If cheque dishonored it must be reversal 

Here i.e. Full cleared items this is not possible to reversal 

But you can make it as open items then reverse 

Path: For reversal of cleared items 

Accounting � financial accounting � General Ledger � Document � Reset 

cleared items (Transaction code FBRA) 

Give the clearing document No.7 


59

Fiscal Year: 2006 


Select resetting & Reserves 

Give the reversal reason – 01 (Reversal in current period) 

Enter 

It gives the message clearing 7 reset. 

Enter 

Go and see the G/L Account FBL3N 




Execute 

Defined „S‟ type 

Define interest calculation Type: 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � General ledger accounting � Business 

transactions � Bank Account in test calculation � Interest calculation Global settings � 

Define interest calculation types 


Interest calculations 

Balance Interest calculations Item interest calculations 

Use fro G/L Accounts 

60 

„P‟ Type 

Use for vendors/customers.

Interest Indicator (Ind Id): M1 

Name: 10% Monthly 

Interest calculation Type: Select „S‟ Balance interest calculation 

Save 


Prepare Account balance interest calculation: 

Same path (Next step) 

Transaction code (OBAA) 


Interest calculation Indicator – M1 

Interest calculation frequency: Select 01 – 1 Month. 

Calendar type 

In case of rupee term loan – Select G (28, 29, 30, 31 /365) 

In case of foreign currency Term loan: Select F (28, 29, 30, 31 /360) 

This is based on LBOR (London Inter bank offer rate) 

Select G 

Select balance plus interest check box 



Define reference interest rates: 


Transactions � Bank account interest calculation � Interest calculation � Define 

reference interest rates (Transaction Code OBAL) 

Interest may be calculated – Method (i) 

61

10/04/06 to 31/3 100000 * 1o/100 * 355/365 = Say 15000 

10/09/06 to 31/03 10000 * 10/100 * 205/365 = Say 3000 

--------- 

12000 

---------- 

(Method – ii) 

10/04/06 to 09/09/06 100000 * 10/100 * 150/365 = 5000 

10/09/06 to 31/03 90000 * 10/100 * 205/365 = 7000 

Here 

Normally banks follow 2 typed of interest rates 

In SAP you have two options for this one 

You can create 2 interest rates for debit & credit items 

Interest indicator - 

In India & US follows the same rate of interest rates 

Hence give „M2‟ for (debit & credit items) 


M1 

Credit Items Debit items 

Ref int rate (M2) 

10% 

62 

Ref int rate (M3) 

8%

Ref Interest rate M2 

Long Text: 10% Monthly 

Short Text: 10% Monthly 

Date from: 01-04-2006 

Currency: INR 



Define time – dependent terms: 

Same path 


Interest calculation indicator M1 

Currency key: INR 

Effective from: 01-04-2006 

Sequential Number: 1 

Terms: Select credit testing column balance interest calculation 

Ref interest rate: M2 



Select next entry button 

Interest calculators Indicator: M1 

Currency Key: INR 

Effective from 01.04.2006 

63

Sequential No. 2 

Term: Select debit interest column balance interest calculation 

Ref. Interest rate: M2 

Save 

Enter interest values: 

Same path: Transaction code (0B83) 


Give the reference interest rate M2 

Effective from 01-04-2006 

Interest rate: 10% 

Save 


Creation of 2 G/L Accounts; 

1 st Accounts: SBI Rupee term loan under secured loans. 

2 nd Account: Interest Account under interest group 

To check account groups for giving account number (Transaction code OBD4) 


Give the chart of account: AML 

Enter 

Note down the range for secured loans: 100300 to 100399 

Note down the range of interest: 400400 to 400499 

64

Creation of G/L Masters: 

Transaction code FS00 



Select with Template button 

Give the G/L Account No. 100000 (Equity share capital) 


Enter 

Save. 

2 nd Account: 

Change account group: Secured Loans 

Change short text and G/L Account log text: SBI Rupee term loan 

Select create/bank/interest 

Field status Group: Select 005 

Interest Indicator: Select M1 

G/L Account No: 400400 





Enter 

Select type/description tab 

65

Account group: Select interest 

Change short text & Long text: Interest Account 

Select save button (or) (ctrl +s) 

Assignment of Accounts for automatic posting 


transactions � Bank Account interest calculation � Interest posting � Prepare G/L 

Account balance Interest calculation (Transaction code (OBV2) 

Select symbols button 

Example: 

100300 - SBI Term Loan 

100301 - ICICI Term Loan 

100302 - IDBI Term Loan 

If we have more than one term loan then give 10 pluses (+ + + + + + + + + +) 

Select Accounts button 

Give your chart of Accounts AML 

Enter 

Give the account symbol – 0002 


Give the G/L Account: 400400 

Give the Account symbol – 2000 


G/L Accounts, Mark with 10 times plus + + + + + + + + + + 



User levels: To open posting period April: 

66

Use the Transaction code OB52 


Give the posting period variant AML 

Enter 

From Period – 1 

Save 


Term Loan receipt (F – 02) 

Give the document data and posting date: 12-04-2006 

Type – SA 


Currency: INR 



Enter 

Give the amount: 100000 


Value date: 10-04-2006 

Text: SBI Rupee term loan receipt 


Account No: 100300 (SBI Rupee Term Loan) 

Enter 

67

Amount: * 


Value date: 10-04-2006 

Text: „+‟ 


Term Loan repayment: 

Give the document data and posting date: 06-09-06 

Type: SA 



Account No: 100300 (SBI Rupee term loan) 

Enter 

Ignore the messages, press enter 



Value date: 10-09-2006 

Text: SBI Term loan repayment 

Give the posting key: 50 

Account No: 200100 (Cash Account) 

Enter 

Amount: * 


Value date: 10-09-2006 

68

Text:‟+‟ 


Interest Calculations: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � General ledger � periodic processing � 

Interest calculation � Balances (F.52) 

Give the G/L Account: 100300 (SBI Term Loans) 

Give the Company code: AML 

Calculation period: 01.04.2006 to 31.03.2007 

Execute 

To view line item wise interest: 


Select additional balance line check box 

Execute 

In case of floating rate of interest 

Select back arrow: To give effect for floating rate of interest open one more session 

with SPRO 

Financial Accounting � General Ledger Accounting � Business transactions � 

Bank Account interest calculation � Interest calculation 

Enter Interest values 

Transaction Code: OB83 


Give the reference interest rate: M2 

Effective from 01.06.2006 

Interest Rate: 12% 

Save 

69


Come to the first session 

Execute 


For interest posting 

Give the calculation period 01.04.2006 to 30.04.2006 

Execute 


Select post interest settlements check box 

Select update master record check box 

Batch input session 

Give the session name: AML 

Posting to business area: AMH 

Posting date of session: 30.04.2006 

Document date of session: 30.04.2006 

Posting segment text: Interest for April 2006 


To post the batch input session 

From the menu select system � Services � Batch input � Sessions 

Select the session Name: AML 

Select process button 

Select display errors only radio button 


70

It gives the message: Processing of batch input session complete 

Select exit batch input button 

To view all document posted use the transaction code FB03 

Enter 


Go and see the G/L Master – FS00 




Foreign currency balances revaluation; 

Foreign currency term loan – may be used 

Long term working capital Fixed assets Purchases 

Local assets Import assets 

Example: If we take foreign currency term loan. 

Exchange rate Amount payable 

On 09.08.2006 – 100000$ 45 4500000 

On 31.03.2007 - 50 5000000 

--------------- 

Excess payable 500000 

--------------- 

71

As per account standard 

The variation is charge to P&L Accounts. 

In case of purchased imported assets 

Add to asset value and calculate depreciation over balance life of asset. 

Customization of Foreign currency 

Creation of 3 G/L Account 

1. SBI Foreign currency term loan – under secured loans group 

2. Exchange gain under other income/ exchange loss under administration 

To check account groups for giving account Number (OBD4) 


Give the chart of accounts: AML 

Enter 

Note down the range for other Income group 300100 to 300199. 

Creation of G/L Masters (FS00) 

Give the G/L Account No: 100301. 





Enter. 

Change the long text, short text to: (SBI FC term loan) 

Select control data Tab 

Give the account currency: USA 

Deselect only balances in local currency check box 

Select create bank/interest tab 

72

Remove interest indicator 

Remove the dates also 

Save. 

2 nd G/L Account: 300100: 



Give the G/L Account No: 400300 (Rent) 


Enter 


Change the account group to other income 

Change short text and long text to exchange gain 






Give the G/L Account: 400300 (Rent account) 

Enter 

Change the short text and long text: Exchange loss 

Other fields are common – Save. 

Define valuation methods: 


transactions � Closing � Valuating � Foreign Currency Valuation � Define Valuation 

Methods. (Transaction Code OB59). 

73


Valuation Methods: AML1 

Description: FC Valuation Bank Selling for AML 

Document Type: SA 

Debit balance exchange rate type (B) (Bank Selling) 

Credit balance exchange rate type – B (Bank Selling) 

Select determine rate type from account balance 



Prepare automatic postings for Foreign Currency valuation 

Transaction code OBA1 

Double click on exchange rate defining using exchange rate key 

Give your chart of accounts: AML 

Enter 

Exchange rate difference key: SD 

Expenses account: 400301 

E/R (Exchange rate) gain account: 300100 

Save 


Assign exchange rate difference key in loan account: (Transaction code is FS00) 

Give the G/L Account No: 100300 (SBI F/C Term loans) 


From the menu select G/L Account charge 

74

Select control data tab 

Exchange rate difference key 

Select USD 

Save. 

Foreign currency term loan receipt (F – 02) 

Give the document data and posting date: 11/08/06 

Type: SA 


Currency: USD: Rate: 45/- 


Give the account No: 200100 (Cash Account) 

Enter 



Text: SBI F/C Term loan received 

Enter 


Account No: 100301 (SBI FC Term loan) 

Enter 

Amount * 


Text: „+‟ 


To enter 31 st March, 2007 exchange rates in forex table 

75

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Environment � 

Current settings � Enter transaction rates (S _ BCE _ 68000174) 


Exchange rate type: „G‟ 

Valid from 31-03-2007 

From Currency: USD 

To Currency: INR 

Direct quotation: 49 

Exchange rate type: B (Bank selling) 

Valid from: 31-03-2007 

From: USD 

To Currency: INR 

Direct quotation: 50 

Save. 

F/C revaluation: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Periodic Processing � 

Closing � Valuate � Foreign Currency Valuation (F.05) 

Enter 


Evaluation period: 31 st March 2007 

Valuation Method: AML1 

Valuation in currency type: Select 10 (Company code currency) 

Select G/L balances tab 

Select valuate G/L Accounts check box 


Execute 

Select posting button 

76

Select back arrow two times 

Showing monthly wise revaluation: Rate of exchange 

Example: If we take 100000 – USD On 11/08/06 - 45 

31/08/06 - 46 

30/09/06 - 48 

Steps to be followed for month end valuation 

Give evaluation key date: 31-08-2006 

Select create positions check box 

Give the reversal posting date: 01-09-2006 

Select reverse postings check box 


Steps to be followed for your end valuation 

Evaluation key date: 31-03-2007 

Select balance sheet preparation valuation check box 

Select create postings check box 

Reverse of posting date: Blank 

Deselect reverse posting check box 

Execute 

Go and see the document FB03 

Enter 

Double click on first line Item. 

To view path when transaction code is given at user level 

77

In the command field enter search _SAP Menu 

Enter 

Search text entry: Transaction Code (F-02) 

Enter 

How to view path in customization: 

SPRO 

Select find button 

Give the search term fiscal year 

Enter 

Select fiscal year under financial accounting Global settings Area 

Enter 

78

It is a subsidiary ledger 

Accounts payable (A/P) 

This used when material management module is not use 

This is used for material purchases & salaries 

When MM Module is used � Use for services where TDS is to be deducted 

When we purchase Raw Material 

Inventory Raw Material Dr (General Ledger) 

To Party A/C (Subsidiary Ledger) – Sundry Creditors 

Raw material (GL A/C) 

↓ 

Reconciliation 

(Or) 

Control A/C 

Basic settings for Accounts payable 

1. Creation of vendor Accounts Groups: 

a. FI (Financial Vendor) (service parties) 

b. MM (Material management vendor) (Material Parties) 

For above both cases we have to specify reconciliation account field 

requirement 

2. Creation of No. ranger for vendor‟s Account 

3. Assign number range group of vendor Account group 

4. Define tolerance group for vendors. 

5. Creation of 2 G/L Masters 

a. Inventory raw material � Current Assets loans & Advances 

b. Sundry Creditors raw materials � Current liabilities & Provision 

6. Creation of Vendor masters 

7. Document type and N0. Ranges � KR – Vendor Invoice 

KZ – Vendor Payment 

KA – Vendor document for transfer/reversal 

8. Posting Keys � 31 Vendor Credit 

25 Vendor debit 

79

1. Creation of vendor accounts groups 

SPRO � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable & Accounts payable � 

Vendor accounts � Master data � Preparation for creating vendor master data � 

define account groups with screen layout (Vendors). 


Account group – AML1 

Name: FI Vendors for AML 

Double click on company code data 

Double click on account management 

Reconciliation account select required entry field 

Cash management makes it suppress field. 


Select create request button 

Give the short description: Account payable (AP) Customization of AML 

Enter 

Press enter once again to save in your request 


Give the account group – AML2 

Name: MM Vendors for AML 


Double click on Account Management 

Reconciliation Account make required entry field 

Cash management group make it suppress 

80

Save. 

Create No. ranges for vendor accounts: 

Same path (Transaction code XKN1) 

Select change intervals button 

Select interval button 

Give the no. range 29 

From No: 8700001 to No: 8800000 

Enter 

Select interval button once again 

No. of range: 39 

From No: 8800001 

To No: 8900000 

Enter and save 

Assign No. ranges to vendor accounts groups: 

Same path 


Give the account group AML1 

Enter 

For AML1 – Assign No. range: 29 

For AML2 – No. range: 39 



81

Define tolerance group of vendors: 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable and Accounts payable � 

Business transactions � out going payments � Manual out going payments � Define 

tolerances (Vendors) 



Tolerance group: Blank 

Give the description � Tolerance group for AML 

Save 


Creation of 2 G/L Accounts: (FS00): 




G/L Account No: 200100 (cash account) 


Enter 

Change short text to inventory RM 

Change G/L log text to inventory raw material 


Change field status group of G001 

Deselect relevant cash flow check box 

82

Save. 

2. G/L Account No: 100501 



Give the G/L Account No: 100500 (out standing expenses) 


Enter 


Change the short text to Sundry Creditors to RM 

G/L Account log text to: Sundry Creditors to Raw material 


Deselect only balance in local currency check box 

Reconciliation Account for account type: Select vendors 

Deselect open item management check box 

Sort Key: Select 012 vendor number 


Field status group select G067 (Reconciliation account) 


Creation of vendor master: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Accounts payable � Master records � 

maintain centrally � Create (XK01) 


83

Account group: Select AML1 

Enter 

Title: Company 

Name: J K Synthetics Ltd. 

Street: Ameerpet 

Postal code: 500000/ Hyderabad 

Country: IN 

Telephone: 55626246 

Select next screen button (3 times) 

Reconciliation Account: Select the drop down the button 

Select 100501 – Sundry Creditors raw material 

Sort key: 012 (Vendor No) 

Select next screen button 

Payment terms: Select 0001 (payable immediately due net) 

Tolerance group: Blank 

Check double invoice check box 


Document types & Number ranges (0BA7) 


Give the document type KR (Vendor Invoice) 

Enter 

Select document type KR 

84


Note down the No. Range: 19 

Select number range information button 




No. Range: 19: year: 2006; From No: 100001 to 200000 

Enter & save 

Select back arrow 3 times 

Select KZ – Vendor payment 


Note down the No. range: 15 

Select No. range information button 




No. Range: 15: year: 2006; From No: 200001 to 300000 

Enter & save 


Select KA – (Vendor Document) 




85

Example: 

Example: 




No. Range: 17: year: 2006: From No: 300001 to 400000 

Enter & save (or) (ctrl + s). 

Banks 

In SAP we can call as House Banks 

In house bank we give details: 

Bank Name 

Address 

Contact person 

Telephone Number 

Current Account 

1 Account ID 

SBI Main 

Branch 

↓ 

Current A/C 1 

SBI Begumpeta Branch 

↓ 

Current A/C 1 

House bank will be created branch wise 

Creation of G/L Account: (FS00) 

SBI Current Account: 

G/L Account No. 200105 


SBI Main Branch 


2 Account ID 

86 


3 Account ID


Give the G/L Account No. 200100 (Cash Account) 


Enter 

Change the short & G/L Account long text to SBI Current account 

Save. 

Define house banks: 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Bank Accounting � Bank accounts � Define 

house banks � (Transaction code FI12) 


Enter 


Give the house bank SBI 

Bank Country: IN (India) 

Bank Key: Any No: (876) 

Give the telephone No 

Contact person 

Save 


Select change button: 

Give the bank name: State Bank of India 

Street: Bank Street 

City: Hyderabad 

Bank Branch: Main branch 

Enter & save 

87

Double click on Bank Accounts folder 


Give the Account ID: SBI 1 

Description: State Bank of India Current A/C No.1 

Bank account No: 9876543210 

Currency: INR 


Save 

Create check lots: (We are giving check No) 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Accounts Payable � Periodic processing 

� Payment (F110) 

From the menu select environment 

Check information 

No. ranges 

Final Transaction code: FCHI 

Give the paying company code: AML 

House bank: SBI 

Account ID: SBI 1 

Select change button 

Select create button 

Give the lot No.1 

Check No: 200001 to 200100 

Select non sequential check box 

Short Information – SBI 

Purchase date: Cheque book Issued date: 14.08.2006 

Enter & Save 

Purchase invoice posting: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts Payable � document entry � 

Invoice general (F-43) 

88


Type: KR 



Account: Select 8700001 (J. K. Synthetics Ltd) 

Enter 

Give the amount 10000 


Text: Purchase invoice postings 


Account No: 200120 (Inventory raw material) 

Enter 

Amount * 


Text: „+‟ 


How to view party account: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts payable � Account � 

Display/change line items (FBL1N) 

Vendor Account: Select 8700001 



89

Execute 

Go and see the G/L Account (FS10N) 

Give the G/L Account no: 100501 (Sundry Creditors raw material) 


Fiscal Year: 2006 

Execute 

Double click on cumulative balance: 10000 

To view party wise 

Select change lay out button 

From the hidden fields column 

Select assignment field 

Select amount in local currency under column content 

Select left arrow (or) show select field‟s button 


Sort key updates assignment fields automatically 

Out going payment with clearing: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Account Payable � Document entry � 

out going payment � post (F-53) 

Document date: 14.08.2006 

Type: KZ 



Account under bank data: 200105 

90


Amount: 10000 


Account under open item selection: 8700001 

Account Type: „K‟ comes by default (Vendor) 


Double click on payable amount: 10000 

Document �Simulate 


Go and see the vendor A/C (FBL1N) 

Give the vendor Account No: 8700001 


Select cleared items radio button 

Select execute 

Manual check creation: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Account Payable � Environment � 

Check information � Create � Manual checks (FCH5) 



Check No: 200010 

Save 

Display check register: 

91


Check information � display � Check register (FCHN) 


Execute 

Double click on check No: 200010 

Select accompanying documents button 

Check encashment date updation: 


Check information � change � Additional info/cash (FCH6) 





Enter 

Give the encashment date: 28.08.2006 

Save 

Go and see the check register: FCHN 

Give the posting company code: AML 

Execute 

Un issued checks cancellation 


Check information � void � Un used checks (FCH3) 




92


Void reason Code: Select 06 (destroy/unusable) 

Select void button 




Account ID: SBI1 

Execute 

Once the check lot is over, keep the cursor on check number from to 

Select in ascending order button. 

How to create void reason code: 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable and account payable � 

business transactions � Out going payments � Automatic out going payments � 

Payment media � Check management � Define void reason codes (Transaction code: 

FCHV) 


Give the reason: 26 

Void reason code: Stop payment for AML 

Save 


Deletion of check encashment date data: 


Check information � Delete � Reset data. (Transaction code: FCHG) 




Give the Check No: 200010 

93

Select reset cashing data radio button 

Execute 

Select the yes button for the message reset data 

Go and see the check register (FCHN) 


House bank SBI 


Execute. 

Issued check cancellation 

En cash checks can not be cancelled 

a. Invoice posting � F-43 

b. Out going payment with cleared items � F-53 

c. Manual check creation � FCH5 

d. Display check register 

e. Issued check cancelled 

Vendors A/C 

Bank 10000 | Open Item 10000 

--------- | --------- 

10000 | 10000 

---------- --------- 

If we cancel the check, open item 10000 is becomes open items/payable 

e. Issued check cancellation 

i. Reset cleared items (To make it as open) 

ii. Reserve transaction 

iii. Cancel check 


Check information � void � cancel payment. (Transaction FCH8) 


House bank SBI 

94


Check No. Select 200010 

Void reason code: Select 26 (Stop payment for AML) 

Give the reversal reason: 01 

Select cancel payment button 

Go and the party account (FBL1N) 

Give the vendor Account No: 8700001 



Execute 



Execute 

Advance payments to vendors 

In SAP it is called as down payments to vendors. 

a. Creation of G/L Account advance to vendors under current assets, loans, 

advances 

b. Link between Sundry Creditors and advance to vendors 

c. Advance payment posting - Advance – Advance to vendor 

- Purchase 

d. Purchase invoice postings 

e. master of advance from special G/L To normal by clearing special G/L items 

f. Clearing of normal items. 

a. Creation of G/L Master (FS00) 




Give the G/L Account: 100501 (Sundry Creditors raw material) 

95


Enter 

Change the account group: Current assets, loans and advances 

Change short text & G/L A/C Long text to advance to vendors 

Other fields are same 


b. Link between Sundry Creditors and advance to vendors 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable & Accounts payable � 

Business transactions � Down payment made � Define alternative reconciliation 

Account for down payments (Transaction code: OBYR) 

Double click on down payment on current assets (or) „A‟ 

Give the chart of Accounts, AML 

Enter 

Give the reconciliation A/C: 100501 

Give the special A/C: 200150 



a). Advance payment posting: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts Payable � Document entry � 

down payment � down payment (Transaction code: F-48) 


96

Type: KZ 

Vendor Account: 8700001 

Give the special G/L Indicator: „A‟ 

Give the bank account: 200105 


Amount: 8888 

Text: Advance payment posting 

Enter 

Amount:‟*‟ 


Text: „+‟ 

Document � Simulate and save 

Go and see the vendor A/C – FBL1N 

Give the vendor A/C No: 8700001 



Select special G/L transaction check box 

Execute 

d. Purchase Invoice Posting:(F-43) 


Type: KR 



97

Give the A/C No: 8700001 

Enter 



Text: purchase invoice posting 


Account no: 200120 (Inventory raw material) 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 






Select normal items check box 

Execute 


Select special G/L Transaction check box along with normal items. 

Execute 

e) Transfer of Advance from special G/L To Normal by clearing special G/L Items: 

98

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts Payable � Document entry � 

down payment � clearing (Transaction code: F-54) 


Type: KA 


Vendor A/C: 8700001 

Give the text: advances transfer posting 

Select process down payments button 

Give the transfer posting 8888 

Save 




Select special G/L Check box 

Execute 




Execute 

f) Clearing of Normal Items 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Accounts Payable � accounts � clear 

(Transaction code: F-44) 


99


Select process open items radio button 

Double click on credit 8888 

Double click on debit 8888 

Save 

Go and see the vendor A/C: FBL1N 

Give the vendor A/C: 8700001 




Execute 

2 nd Scenario - Advance more bill less: 

Advance - 100000 

Bill - 20000 

a. Advance payment posting (F-48) 

b. Purchase invoice posting (F-43) 

c. Transfer to advance amount of Rs. 20000 from special G/L to normal (F-54) 

d. Clearing of normal items (F-44) 

Net result: In balance sheet shown as current assets – Advance to vendors 80000 

3 rd Scenario - Advance less – Bill More: 

Advance - 50000 

Bill - 150000 

a. Advance payment posting (F-48) 

b. Purchase invoice posting (F-43) 

c. Transfer of Advance from G/L to normal by clearing special G/L items (F-54) 

d. While making balance payment of Rs. 100000 

Double click on payable amount 150000 and amount paid 50000 

And the 3 rd line items will go cleared items (F-53) 

100

Terms of Payment: 


Business transactions � Incoming invoices (Credit memos) � Maintain terms of 

payment 


Give the payment terms: AML 

Select customer check box 

Select vendor check box 

Document date: Posting Bill date 

Posting date: 

Entry date 

With in 10 days: 3% cash discount 

With in 20 days: 2% Cash discount 

With in 30 days: due 

Select default for base line date: posting date 

1 st term: 3% - 10 days 

2 nd term: 2% - 20 days 

3 rd term: No discount – 30 days 

Press Enter 

Save 


Cash discount: 

Creation of G/L Account: Called cash discount received under other income group 

(T.code (FS00) 




Give the G/L Account No: 300100 (Exchange gain) 


Enter 

Change the short text and G/L Account long text to: cash discount received 



101

Assignment of account for automatic postings: 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable and accounts payable � 

Business transactions � out going payments � out going payment global settings � 

define accounts for cash discount taken. (Transaction code is OBXU) 

Give your chart of accounts: AML 

Enter 


Give the account No: 300101 



Purchase invoice posting: (F-43) 

Document date: 01.08.2006 (Party bill date) 

Posting date: 16.08.2006 (Goods received date) 

Type: KR 



Give the account no: 8700001 

Enter 



Payment terms: AML1 

102

Text: Purchase invoice posting 

Enter 

Ignore the message, press enter 

Give the posting key: 40 

Give the account No: 200120 (Inventory raw material) 

Enter 

Amount: „*„ 


Text: „+‟ 


Go and see the vendor A/C: (FBL1N) 

Vendor account: 8700001 



Execute 

Select change lay out button 

From the hidden fields column select current cash discount amount fields 

Select amount in document currency under column content. 

Select left arrow button 


Out going payment: (F-53) 


103

Type: KZ 



Account number under bank data: 200105 


Amount: 97000 

Text: out going payment 

Account: under open item selection: 8700001 

Account type: K comes by default 


Double click on payable amount: 100000 

Document� Simulate 

Double click on blue font line items 

Text: enter „+‟ 

Save. 

Automatic payment program: 

Advantage: 

System will verify the due dates 

System issue check 

System will pass the entry and clear party account 

It will prepare payment advice 

It updates check register automatically 

It will be used by cash rich companies 

It will be run this weekly/10days/15days/Monthly. 

Your check lot should be sequential 

104

We are not programmers we used system defined check format and payment 

advice format. 

Give ranking bank wise with available balance 

Before issue to gives a proposal 

It shows for which party for which bills from which bank it is going to issue the 

checks. 

We can edit the proposal 

Edit the proposal: 

1. By blocking some invoices for payment 

2. By changing bank 

1 st step: Set up – payment methods per country for payment transactions 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable and accounts payable � 

Business transactions � out going payments � Automatic out going payments � 

Payment method/ bank � selection for payment program � set up payments method per 

country for payment transactions (Transactions code: FBZP) 


Give the country: IN (India) 

Payment method: J 

Description: Check 

Select out going payments radio button 

Select check radio button 

Document type for payment: KZ 

Clearing document type: KZ 

Payment medium program: This is system defined program(REFOUS_C) 

Name of the print data: LIST1S 

Save 

105


Set up Payment methods for company code for payment transactions: 




Minimum amount: 100 

Maximum amount: 9999999999 

Select payment per due day check box 

Select form data button 

Form for the payment transfer medium: Note down 

F110 – Premium – Check 

Drawer of the form: For Aravind Mills Ltd. 

Authorized signatory 

Save 


Set up All Company codes for payment transactions: 

Same path: 



Paying company code: AML 

Select separate payment per business area check box 

Special G/L Transactions to pay under vendors: Enter A (Advance) 

Save 


106

Set up paying company code for payment transactions: 

Same path 



Select forms button 

Form for the payment advice (F110_ D_ AVIS) 

Select sender details button 

Text I.D: Select ST (Standard text) 

Letter header: F_ 0001 _ Header 

Footer text: F _ 0001 _ Footer 

Sender: F_0001_ Sender 



Creation of sequential check lots:(Transaction code: (FCHI) 


Hose Bank: SBI 




Give the lot No: 2 

Give the check No: 500001 to 501000 

107

Deselect non sequential check box 


Bank determination: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounts � accounts payable � Periodic processing � 

Payments (Transaction code F110) 

From the menu select environment � Maintain configuration 

Select bank determination button 



Enter 

Select paying company code: AML 

Double click on ranking order folder 


Give the payment method: J 

Currency: INR 

Rank order: 1 

House Bank: SBI 

Save 


Double click on bank accounts folder: 




Currency: INR 


Bank sub account: 200105 (SBI Current account) 


108

Save 

Double click on available amounts folder: 




Days: enter 999 

Currency: INR 

Available for out going payments: 2000000 

Save 

Assign payment method in vendor master: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Accounts payable � Master records � 

Maintain centrally � Change (Transaction code: XK02) 

Give the vendor No: 8700001 


Select payment transaction check box under company code data 

Enter 


Save 

Purchase invoice posting (F-43) 


Type: KR 



Account No: 8700001 

Enter 

109

Amount: 6666 


Payment term: 0001 

Text: Purchase invoice testing 


Account No: 200120 (Inventory raw material) 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 


Automatic Payment Program run (F110) 

Run date: 23.08.2006 

Identification: AML1 

Select parameter tab 

Your posting date and documents entered up to date is come automatic 


Payment methods: J 

Next posting date: 30.08.2006 

Vendor A/C: 8700001 to 8800000 

Save 


Select schedule proposal button 

Select start immediately check box 

Enter 

Go and press enter till you get the message payment proposal has been created 

Select edit proposal button 

110

Enter 

Double click on amount field 16666 

To block invoice for payment double click on invoice amount 

Payment block select A (Block for payment) 

Enter 

To change the bank double click on invoice amount 

Select real locate button 


Give the house bank: SBI 



Select back arrow: 2 times 

It gives the message payment proposal has been edited 

Select payment run button 

Enter 

Go and press enter till you get the message payment run has been carried out 

For check Printing: 

Select print out /data medium tab 

For the program: RF FOUS _ C 

Give the variant: AM 

Select maintain variants button 

Select continue button 

111

Give the program run date: 23.08.2006 

Identification feature: AML1 

Paying company code: AML 

Payment Method: J 




Check lot No: 0002 

Select print checks check box 

Printer Name: LP01 

Select print immediately check box 

Select print payment advice notes check box 

Printer: LP01 

Select: Print immediately check box 

Select print payment summary check box 

Printer: LP01 

Select: Print immediately check box 

Number of sample print outs – „0‟ 

Select don‟t void any checks check box 

Select attributes button 

Give the description: SBI Check print 23.08.2006 

Save 


112

Save 

Once again select back arrow 

Select print out button 

For job Name, in place of question mark 

Give the variant: AM 

Enter 


To view the check printing, for the menu select system � services � out put 

control 

Execute 

Select check spool no. Check box 

Select display contents button 

Go and see the party A/C: (FBL1N) 




Execute 

Double click on the line item having document type KZ for Rs. 6666 

Select call up document over view button 

From the menu select environment check information 


Give the paying compared code: AML 

Execute 

113

Credit memo: This is done when the material returned reduced price 

a) Vendor raised credit note on AML (Document Type: KA) 

b) AML raises debit note on vendor (Document Type: KG) 

For both above cases no. Ranges: 17 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts payable � Document entry � 

Credit memo – general (F-41) 

types) 


Type: KG 



Give the account No; 8700001 

Enter 



Text: Credit memo posting 


Account No; 200120 (Inventory raw material) 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 

Document� Simulate and save 

` Accounts Receivable (A/R) 

-This is also a subsidiary ledger. 

-This is used when sales & distribution module is not implemented 

-This is used all types of sales (Product sale, serial sale & assets sales and all 

114

When S.D is implemented: When scrap sales, asset sales 

When you make a sale 

(GL) It updates sundry debtors � Customers A/C Dr (Subsidiary ledger (S.L) 

To Sales A/C (General Account) (G.L) 

↓ 

In SAP it is called reconciliation A/C 

In normal Accounting it is called control account 

Basic settings for accounts receivable: 

a.) Creation of customer Accounts groups: 

Two types of customs 

FI – Customers – assets sales, scrap sale parties 

SD – Customers – products sales 

b. Define No. ranges for customers Accounts: 

c. Assign No. ranges to customer accounts groups 

d. Creation of 2 G/L Accounts: 

i. Sundry Debtors � Under Current assets, loans & advances 

ii. Sales Accounts – Under sales account 

e. Creation of customer master 

f. Document types and No. ranges 

Dr – Customer Invoices 

DZ – Customer Payment 

DA – Customer document for transfers/reversals 

g. Posting Keys: 01 – Customer debit 

15 – Customer Credit 

a. Creation of customer account groups: 


Customer Accounts � Master data � Preparation for creating customer master data � 

Define accounts groups with screen lay out (Customers) 

115


Give the account group: AML1 

Name: FI Customer for AML 


Double click on Account management 

Reconciliation accounts select required entry fields 

Save 


Give the description of: A/R Customization for AML 

Enter & save in your request 



Give the name: SD Customers for AML 


Double click on account management 

Reconciliation A/C select required entry field 

Save 

b. create No. ranges for Customers Accounts: 

Same path (Transaction Code: XDN1) 



116

No. range: 32: From No: 6200000: to Number: 6300000 

Enter 

Select interval button once again 

Give the No. range: 33 

From No: 6300001: To Number: 6400000 

c. Assign No. ranges to customer Account groups 

Same path 



Enter 

For AML1 – Assign No. range: 32 

For AML2 – Assign No. range:33 

Save 


a. Creation of G/L Accounts: (FS00) 

1. Give the G/L Account No: 200110 





Enter 

Change short text & G/L Long text to Sundry Debtors A/C 

117


Reconciliation A/C for A/C type: Select customers 

Sort Key: Select 031 Customers No. 


Field status group: (G067) 

Save 

2. Give G/L Account No: 300000 



Give the G/L Account No: 300100 (Exchange gain) 


Enter 


Account group: Sales 

Change short text and G/L Account long text to: sales account 

Save 

b. Creation of customer master: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable � Master records � 

maintain centrally � Create (XD01) 

118

Account group: Select FI Customers for AML 


Enter 

Title: Select Company 

Name: J. K. Synthetics Ltd 

Address: Ameerpet: Postal Code: 500000: City: Hyderabad: Country: IN 


Give the vendor No: 8700001 

Select company code data button 

Reconciliation A/C selects 200110 (Sundry Debtors) 

Give the sort key: 031 (Customer Number) 

Select payment transactions 

Terms of payment � 0001 (Payment immediately due next) 

Save 

Document types and no. ranges: (OBA7) 

Select document type: DR (Customer invoices) 







No. range: 18: year: 2006: From No: 400001 to 500000 

119



Select type: D2 (Customer Payment) 





Select Change intervals button 


No. range: 14: year: 2006: From No: 500001 to 600000 



Select DA: (Customer Document) 





Select Change intervals button 



Year: 2006: From No: 600001: to 700000 


Posting of sale invoice: 

120

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Accounts receivable � document entry � 

invoice general (F-22) 


Type: DR 



Give the account: 6200001 

Enter 



Text: Sales posting 


Account Number 300000 (Sales A/C) 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 


How to view customer account: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable � Accounts display/ 

change line items (FBL5N) 

Give the customer account: 6200001 




Execute 

121

Select back arrow to view vendor and customers transactions together: 

Select vendor items check box along with normal items check box execute 

Incoming payment and clearing vendor & customer transactions together: 

Document type: „DZ‟ should allow vendor and customer transactions 

Transaction code: OBA7 

Select document type: DZ 


Select vendor check box 

Save 


Incoming payment: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable � Document entry 

� Incoming payment (Transaction code F-28) 


Type: DZ: Company code: AML: Clearing text: Incoming Payment 

Account under bank data: 200105 (SBI Current Account) 


Amount: 991000 

Text: Incoming payment 

Account under open item selection: 6200001 

Account type: D comes by default (D for Customers) 

Select other accounts check box 


122

Select standard open items check box 

Select A/C No: 8700001 

Account type: Select K 


Select standard item check box 


Double click on all the line items 

Document� Simulate and save 

Go and see the customers A/C – (FBL5N) 

Give the customer A/C: 6200001 




Select vendor items check box 

Execute 

Advance receipts from customers: 

A) Creation of G/L Accounts, advance from customer under current liabilities and 

provisions 

B) Link between Sundry Debtors and advance from customers. 

Advance (A) – special G/L Indicator: 

a) Sundry Debtors: Reconciliation Account 

b) Advance from customers (Alternative reconciliation a/c) – Special G/L A/c 

c) Advance receipt posting 

d) Sales posting 

e) Transfer of advance from G/L to normal by clearing special G/L Items 

f) Clearing of normal items 

123

Creation of G/L Account: (FS00) 

Advance from customers: under current liabilities & provisions 

Give the G/L account no: 100502 



Give the G/L Account no: 200110 (Sundry debtors) 


Enter 

Change the accounts group to : Current Liabilities & provisions 

Change short text & G/L Account long text to: Advance from customers 

Save. 

B) Link between sundry debtors and advance from customers 

Path: SPRO� Financial accounting�account receivable and accounts 

payable�Business transactions�Down payment received�define reconciliation 

account for customer down payment (T. Code :OBXR) 

Double click on down payment or A 


Enter 

Give the reconciliation A/C: 200110 

Special G/L Account: 100502 

Save 


124

Advance receipt posting: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Account receivable � document entry � 

down payment � down payment (F-29) 


Type: DZ 


Customer Account: 6200001 

Special G/L indicator A 

Bank Account: 200105 



Text: Advance receipt posting 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 


Go and see the customers A/C: (FBL5N) 

Give the customer account No: 6200001 



Select special G/L transactions check box 

125

Execute 

Sales posting: (F-22) 


Type: DR 



Account: 6200001 

Enter 





Account No: 300000 (Sales account) 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 


Go and see the customer A/C: (FBL5N): 

Customer A/C No: 6200001 




Execute 


126

Select special G/L transactions check box along with normal items 

Execute 

Transfer to advance from special G/L to normal by clearing special G/L items: 

Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable � document entry � down 

payment � clearing (F-39) 


Type: DA 



Text: Advance receipt clearing 


Give the transfer posting 9999 

Save 

Go and see the customer A/C:(FBL5N) 

Customer A/C: 6200001 



Select special G/L transactions check box 

Execute 




Execute 

127

Clearing of normal items: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Accounts receivable � Account � Clear 

(F-32) 




Double click on 9999 debit 

Double click on 9999 credit 


Go and see the customer A/C:(FBL5N): 

Give the customer account no: 6200001 




Execute 

Bill discounting: 2 types. 

1. Fund based limits: 

Cash credits � Local sales 

Bank over draft 

Packing credits 

Bill discounting � Export sales order 

2. Non fund based limits: 

Example: 

Bank guarantee (B/G) 

Letter of Credit (L/C) 

128

30 days credit 

AML � Discount with SBI � J. K. Synthetics � Liability is unclear 

(Contingent liability) 

It should shown in schedule VI – balance sheet as notes to be accounts 

Bill discount entries normal package & SAP: 

Normal A/C: 

a. Sales � Customer A/C Dr 

To sales A/C 

b. Bill of exchange payment: 

No Entry 

c. Bill discounting 

Bank current A/C Dr 

Interest A/C Dr 

To Bank bill discount 

d) Report to view customer wise, Bill wise due data wise and bank wise out standing 

available in SAP 

e) Contingent liability 

Bank bill discount A/C Dr 

To Customer A/C 

SAP: 

a) Customer A/C Dr 

Sundry Debtors A/C Dr 

To Sales A/C 

b) Customer special G/L (W) A/C Dr (Bill of Exchange) 

To Customer with clearing A/C 

(Sundry Debtors) 

Bank A/C Dr 

Interest A/C Dr 

To Bank Bill discount A/C 

The above 2 entries together 

Bank Bill Discount Dr (with clearing) 

To customer special (w) with clearing 

(Sundry Debtors bill of exchange) 

Presentation to balance sheet (in SAP) 

129

Sundry Debtors = Sundry Debtors 

Sundry Debtors Bill of exchange – Debit | Net zero. 

Bank Bill Discounting – Credit | 

Customization: 

1. Creation of 2 G/L Accounts: 

a) Sundry Debtors Bill of exchange – Under current assets loans and advances. 

b) SBI Bill discounting: - Under secured Loans 

Path: use the transaction code: (FS00) 

Give the G/L Account No: 200111 (Current Assets, Loans & Advances) 



Give the G/L A/C No: 200110 (Sundry Debtors) 


Enter 

Change short text to Sundry Debtors (B/E) 

Change G/L long text: Sundry Debtors (Bills of exchange) 


Save (or) (Ctrl + s) 

2) G/L Account No: 100301 



Select G/L Account No: 100300 (SBI Rupee term loan) 


Enter 

Change the short text and G/L Account long text to SBI Bill discounting 


130

Select open item management check box 


Select post automatically only check box 

Save 

c) Link between Sundry Debtors and Sundry debtors Bill of exchange: 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Bank Accounting � Business transactions � 

Bill of exchange transactions � Bill of exchange receivable � Post bill of exchange 

receivable � define alternative reconciliation account for bills of exchange receivable 

(Transactions Code OBYN) 

Double click on bill of exchange receivable/w 


Enter 

Reconciliation A/C 200110 

Special G/L A/C 200111 

Save 


d) Link for Sundry Debtors Bank Current Account and Bank Bill discounting A/C: 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Bank Accounting � Business transactions � 

Bill of exchange transactions � Bills of exchange receivable � Present bill of exchange 

receivable at bank � define bank sub accounts (Transaction Code OBYK) 



Bank A/C: 200105 (SBI Current Account) 

Usage: Select discounting 

Special G/L Integrator: W 

Customer‟s reconciliation Account: 200110 

131

Sub sub account for Liability: 100302 (SBI Bill discount) 

Save 


Sales posting: (F-22) 


Type: DR 



Accounts: 6200001 

Enter 

Amount: 9999 


Payment Terms: set NT 30 – Net 30 


Enter 

Ignore the warning message, press enter 


Account No: 300000 (Sales Account) 

Enter 



132

Text: „+‟ 


Bill exchange payment: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � account receivable � document entry � 

bill of exchange � Payment (F-36) 


Type: DZ 


Posting key: 09 (special G/L Debit) 


Special G/L Indicator: W 

Enter 



Text: bill of exchange payment 

Due on: 29.09.2006 

Planned usage: Select, discounting 

Domicile: SBI 

Central bank location: Main branch, Hyderabad 

Select choose open items button 


133

Double click on receivable amount: 9999 

Save 

Note down document no: 500003 

Bill of exchange discounting: 

Same path: (F-33) 


Type: DA 


Give the bank account: 200105 (SBI Current assets) 


Amount: 9000 

Text: SBI Bill discounting 


Give the account No: 400400 (Interest A/C) 

Enter 

Amount: 999 


Text: „+‟ 

Press select bill of exchange button 



Report to view customers wise, bill wise, due date wise, and bank wise out 

standings: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Accounts receivable � Periodic 

processing � Bill of Exchange processing � Korea � Bill of exchange management 

(S _ ALR _ 87012213) 

Give the chart of Accounts: AML 



134

Special G/L Indicator: W 

Usage: Select D (Discounting) 

Select discounted/collected radio button 

Execute 

Select current lay out button 

Keep the fields 

Due date, document No, customer, received from document date 

Domicile, amount in local currency 

Select copy button, select save lay out button 

Select lay out name: AML 

Description: AML lay out 

Select save 

Reverse contingent liability: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Accounts receivable � document entry � 

Bill of Exchange � reverse contingent liability (F-20) 

Document date& posting: 27.09.2006 

Type: DA 


Currency: INR 

G/L Account No: 200111 (Sundry Debtors bill of exchange) 

Usage: Select discounting 

Due by date: 30.09.2006 

Customer: 6200001 

135

Select edit line items button 

Ignore warning messages: Press enter 

Select drop down button for currency field 

+ is set item to active 

++ set items in block to active 

- set items not inactive 

-- set items in blocks to inactive 

Select + set items to active 

Save 

From the menu select document display. 

If bill is dishonored: 

If bill is dishonored your contingent liability becomes actual liability 

Pass the all the entries previous and pass entries (F-22) 

01 Customer A/C Dr 

50 SBI Current A/C 

Dunning means reminder: 

Dunning: 

When the customer does not make payment as per terms of payment we will issue 

dunning letters. 

We are using system defined forms/letters 

We are use the term called dunning area 

Dunning area can be company whole/location/region 

Dunning levels � Type of letters � Maximum available – 9 levels. We are using 4 

levels. 

Dunning intervals/frequency � example: every 10 days 

Grace period 

Dunning charges � amount/percentage/level wise 

Define dunning area: 

136

Path: SPRO � Financial accounting � Accounts receivable & Accounts payable � 

Business transactions � Dunning � Basic settings for dunning � Define dunning areas. 



Area: Max: 2 characters 

Text: Dunning area for AML 


Ignore the message press enter. 


Define dunning procedure: 

Path: SPRO � Financial accounting � Accounts receivable and accounts payable � 

Business transactions � Dunning � Dunning procedure � Define dunning procedures 

(Transaction code: FBMP) 

Select new procedure button 

Give the dunning procedure: AML 

Name: Dunning procedure for AML 

Give dunning interval in days: 10 days 

No. of dunning levels: 4 

Line items grace periods: 3 days 

Interest indicator: Select 01 

Select standard transaction dunning check box 

Note: In case of vendors it has to take special G/L Transactions when we want to issue 

reminder letters to vendors. 

Select special G/L Indicator button 

Ignore the warning message 

Enter 

137

Under vendors select „A‟ check box (Deselect) 


Select dunning text button 


Select custom radio button 

Enter 

Select new company code button 


Enter 

Select separate notice per dunning level check box 


Select „yes‟ button for the message to save the data 


Select dunning text button once again 

Company code AML and customer also selected automatically 

Enter 

Open one more session with (FBMP) 

Double click on procedure 001 

Select dunning text button 

Give the company code: 0001 

Select customer radio button 

Enter 

Come to the 1 st session (copy & paste) 

138

1 st column: Dunning Level1 – Form F150 – DUNN -01 

Level2 – F150 – DUNN 01 

Level3 – F 150 – DUNN 02 

Level 4 – F150 – DUNN -02 

Select dunning levels button 

Select always dun check box for all the 4 levels 

Select changes button 

Currency: INR 

Enter 



Ignore the warning messages press enter 

Press enter to save in your request 

Assign dunning procedure in customer master: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts receivable � Master records � 

Maintain centrally � change (XD02) 

Give the customers No; 6200001 


Enter 

Select company code data button 

Select correspondence tab 

Dunning procedure: Select AML 

Save 

Sales posting:(F-22) 

Document and posting date: 25.08.2006 

Type: DR 


Currency: INR 



Enter 

Ignore the message press enter 

139

Amount: 8888 




Account No: 300000 (Sales A/C) 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 


Dunning: (F150): 

Accounting � Financial accounting � Accounts receivable � Periodic processing � 

dunning (F150) 

Give the run on date: 01.09.2006 

Identification: AML1 

Select parameter tab 

Give the dunning date: 01.09.2006 

Documents posted up to: 01.09.2006 


Customer: 6200001 to 6300000 

Save 


Select schedule button 

Select start immediately check box 

Out put device: LP01 

140

Select schedule button 

Go on press enter till you get the message dunning selection is complete 

Select dunning print out button 

Out put device: LP01 


Select print button 

Go on press enter till you get the message dunning print out is complete 

Select dunning history button 

Account type: Select D (Customers) 


Execute 

Keep the cursor any where on the item – select display 

Dunning notice bull 

Keep the cursor on document No 

Select print preview button 

Give the out put device: LP01 


Go and see the customer master (XD02) 

Give the customer No: 6200001 


Enter. 

Sales Tax: 

141

Sales tax calculation: 

Basic XXX 

Excise duty XXX 

-------- 

XXX 

VAT on( basic + excise duty) 

-------- 

Total XXX 

-------- 

Excise duty: 

Duty based on material 

This is shown I chapter ID 

Input tax: 

Price – 100 Rs. – qty – 1 kg 

Basic – 100 – inventory Raw Material 

4% VAT - 4 – VAT receivable A/C 

------ 

Party A/C 104 VAT pool A/C 

Credit ------ 

Out put tax: 

Sales price -200: qty: 1kg 

Basic - 200 – Sales A/C 

VAT 12.5% - 25 – VAT Payable 

------ 

Customer debit 225 VAT pool A/C 

------ 

Payment to sales tax dept: 25-4 = 21 


Purchase 

(In put tax) 

Sales 

142 

Sales 

(Out put tax)

Define tax procedure: 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Financial accounting global settings � Tax on 

sales/ purchases � Basic settings � check calculation 

Procedure: 

Double click define procedures 


Procedure: „K Tax‟ 

Description: Sales tax India 

Save 


Select procedure K Tax 

Double click on control data folder 


Step 1 

C Type: condition type: select BASB (Base amount) 

Step 2: condition type: MWVS (Input tax) 

From: 1to1 

Account key: VST (Input tax) 

Step 3: condition type: MWAS (Output tax) 

From: 1 to1 

Account key: MWS (Output tax) 

Save 

Assign country to calculation procedure 

Same path 

143



Enter 

Assign the procedure: „K Tax‟ 

Save 


Creation of tax codes: 

Path: SPRO � Financial accounting � Financial Accounting global setting � Tax on 

sales/ purchases � calculation � define tax codes on sales and purchases (Transaction 

code: FTXP) 


Enter 

Give the tax code: VO 

Enter 

Give the description: VO: 0% Input taxes 

Tax type: select V = Input tax 

Enter 

Input tax percent rate: Give 0 (zero) 

Keep the cursor on out put tax percent rate: select deactivate line 


Tax code: V1 

Enter 

Tax code: V1 (4% Input tax) 

Tax type: Select V (Input tax) 

144

Enter 

Input tax percent rate: 4% 

Keep the cursor on output tax percent rate: select deactivate line button 

Save 

Tax code: A0 (A & Zero) 

Enter 

Description: 0% output tax 

Tax type: A (output tax) 

Enter 

Output tax percent rate: 0 

Keep the cursor on Input tax percent rate 

Select deactivate line button 

Save 

Tax code: A1 

Enter 

Description: 12.5% Output tax 

Tax type: A (Output tax) 

Enter 

Give the output tax: 12.5% 

Keep the cursor on input tax percent rate: select deactivate line button. 

Save 

145

Assign tax codes for non- taxable transactions: 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Financial accounting global settings � Tax on 

sales/purchases � posting � assign tax codes for non taxable 

(Transaction code: OBCL) 



Enter 

For company code: AML: Assign input tax code: VO 

Output tax code: AO 


Creation of G/L Account – VAT Pool Account: (FS00): 






Enter 

Change short text to VAT Pool A/C 

G/L Text long text – VAT Pool A/C 


Field status group: G041 (Tax office clearing account) 

Save 

Define Tax account: 

146

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Financial Accounting global settings � Tax on 

sales/purchases � posting � define tax accounts (Transaction code: OB40) 

Double click on transaction VST (Input tax) 

Chart of accounts: AML 

Enter 



Save: save in your request 


Double click on transaction MWS (Output tax) 

Save 



Assign tax codes in Sales Tax: (FS00) 

Give the G/L Account No: 300000 (sales account) 


From the menu select G/L Account � change 


Tax category: select * (All tax types allowed) 

Select posting with out tax allowed check box 

Save 

Ignore the message 

Press enter 

In normal financial work in SAP is: 

Define – Tax procedure 

- Tax codes 

147

- G/L Account 

- Assign G/L Account 

Purchase order 

Material – 

Qty: 1 

Price – 100 

Tax code: V1 

Basic – 100 

MM 

Tax code:V1 – 4 � VST �(200155) 

(4%) ----- 

Vendor credit 104 

------ 

148 

Sales order 

Material 

Qty: 1 

Price – 200 

Journal entry: 

Customers A/C Dr 225 

To sales 200 

VAT Pool A/C 25 

Posting of sale invoice (F-22) 


Type: DR 




Enter 


Tax code: A1 

Basic - 200 

SD 

Tax code: A1 25 � MWS � (2001550 

(12.5%) ------- 

Customer debit 225 

-------

Select calculate tax check box 




Account No: 300000 (sales A/C) 

Enter 


Tax code: A1 


Text: „+‟ 

Document � Simulate 

Double click on VAT Pool A/C line item 


Text: „+‟ 


Classic: SAP Introduced in India 1995 

With holding tax (TDS) 

| | 

Classic Extended 

1996, 97, 98,99,2000 if there is any changes the company will provide program called 

patches or hot packs 

Extended: Instead of patches/hot Packs Company provides original program with 

additional program (Because patches are more than original program) 

TDS is applicable other than salaries 

149

Contacts - 194C 

Professional charges – 194J 

Rent – 194I 

TCS – Scrap sales/waste sales ( to collect at source) 

In India TDS is introduced in DEC.2003 

In Interim budget – introduced education cess-2% 

Previous Present 

Contractors 26 L 26 

Rent 26 I 26 

Professional Charges 26 J 26 

Sec 194c – TDS on contractors: 

a)Recipient � The person who is receiving money – It may be company, partnership 

firm or others 

Company/firm others 

b)TDS 2% of basic 2% of basic 

Surcharge 10% of Basic TDS 10% of basic TDS, if the value 

Exceeds 10 lakhs in a year 

Educational Cess 2% 2% 

Educational cess is calculated 2% on (TDS + Surcharge) 

c) Choice to use one code or number of codes – It is advised to go for No. of codes 

d) TDS is to be deducted at the time of invoice posting or advance payment posting 

which ever is earlier. 

e) If the value is less than 20000/- in the whole year –TDS need to be deducted. 

f) The contractor can get exemption certification from dept for nil rate/lower rates. 

g) Exemption certificate given for each year. 

h) To make TDS payment with in 7 days from the close of the month 

If 7 days comes on holiday, choice to pay one day before or after 

i) Incase of year end credits – TDS to be paid before 31 st May 

j) Issue TDS certificate in form – 16A – you can issue monthly (or) consolidate 

certificate. 

k) File annual return (Now quarterly) in form – 26 

l) If the bid includes material and service changes – Deduct TDS on service charges. 

Customization in SAP: 

Check with hold tax countries: 

150

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Financial Accounting Global settings � with 

hold tax � Extended with holding tax � basic settings � check with hold tax countries 


Give the country – IN (India) 

Enter 

Define official with holding tax codes: 

Same path 

Give the country key: IN (India) 

Enter 


Official key: 194C 

Name: TDS on contractors 

Save 

City office 

Define business places: 

AML 

HYDERABAD BANGALORE MUMBAI 

Factory 

151

Up to extended with hold tax the path is same, and then basic settings � India � define 

business places 


Enter 


Give the business place: AMLF 

Description: Hyderabad factory for AML 

Save 

Give the name: Hyderabad factory for AML 

Enter 

Save in your request in accounts payable request 

Maintain holiday calendar: 

Path: SPRO � General settings � maintain calendar 

Select public holidays radio button 



Select with fixed date radio button 


Give the date: 26 

Month: 01 (January) 

Give the public holiday short text: Republic day 

Holidays long text: Republic day 


152


Select back arrow and create holiday 

Select holiday calendar radio button 



Give the calendar ID – A1 

Description: Holiday calendar for AML Hyderabad factory 

Select assign public holiday button 

From the list select republic day check box 

Select assign public holiday button 

Save 



Select factory calendar radio button 



Give the factory calendar ID: A2 

Give the description: AML Hyderabad factory calendar 

Give the holiday calendar ID: A1 

Select Monday to Saturday check box 

Save 


Assign factory calendar to business places: 

153

Path: Up to extended with holding tax the path is same. Basic settings � India � assign 

factory calendars to business places. 



Business place: AMLF 

Factory calendar: A2 

Tax due date rule: select day before 

Save 

Save in your request in accounts payable 

Define with hold tax type for invoice posting: 

Path: Up to extended with hold tax the path is same 

Calculation � with hold tax type � define with hold tax type for invoice posting 


Enter 


Give the with hold tax: K1 

Description: Sec 194C contractors invoice basic 

Basic amount: select gross amount radio button 

Select with hold tax commercial round button 

Select post with hold tax button 

Select no accumulation radio button 

Deselect manual with hold tax check box 

Save 

154



Select K1 (What you are created) 


Change with hold tax type to: K2 

Description: Sec 194C – contractors invoice surcharge 

Enter 

Save 


Select K1 & K2 


Change with hold tax type: K3 

Description: Sec 194C – contractors invoice – basic ed. Cess 

Select inherent base check box 

Enter 


Description: Sec 194C contractors invoice – Surcharge ed. Cess 


Enter & save 

Define with hold tax type for payment posting: 

Same path 


Enter 

155


With hold tax type: KA 

Description: Sec 194C contractor‟s adv. Basic 

Select gross amount radio button 

Select with hold tax amount check box 

Select no accumulation radio button 

Deselect manual with hold tax check box 

Select control invoice proportionate radio button 

If advance paid: 

Aug: Vendor A/C Dr 100000 

To Bank A/C 98000 

To TDS A/C 2000 

September: Conversion charges A/C Dr 300000 

To Party A/C 294000 

To TDS A/C 6000 

Transfer to advance 

TDS 2000 Debit 

(The use of centrally invoice posting is if there is any TDS on advance, that will be 

proportionately deduct while payment (TDS) is made on invoice 



Select with hold tax type: KA 


Change with hold tax type: KB 

Description: Sec 194C. Contractors advance surcharge 

156


Select KA & KB 


Change the with hold tax type to KC 

Change description to Sec 194C – contractors advance basic ed. Cess. 

Select inherent basic check box 

Enter 

Change with hold tax type: KD 

Description: sec 194C Contractors adv. Surcharge ed. Cess 


Enter and save. 

Define with holding codes: 

Up to extended with holding tax path is same 

Calculation � with holding tax codes � define with holding tax codes 

Give the country Key: IN (India) 

Enter 


With hold tax type: K1 

With hold tax code: K1 

Official with hold tax code key: select 194C 

Description: Sec 194C contractors Invoice basic 

Percentage subject to tax under base amount: 100% 

With hold tax: 2% 

157

Posting indicator: select 1: standard posting: bank/vendor Customer line item reduced 

Save 



Select K1 



Change with hold tax code: K2 

Description: Sec 194C – contractor invoice surcharge 

Example: Basic rate: 100000 * 2/100 = 2000 

Surcharge: 10% on basic rate (or): 2000*10/1000=200 (or) 

0.2% on basic amount = 100000*0.2/100=200 

With hold tax rate: 0.20 


Select K1&K2 



With hold tax code: K3 

Description: Sec 194C contractors invoice basic ed. Cess 

Press enter 


Change with hold tax code: K4 

Change description: Sec 194C contractors invoice surcharge ed. Cess 

158

With hold tax rate: 2% 



Select K1, K2, K3, &K4 


Change with hold tax type: KA 

Change with hold tax code: KA 

Change description to: Contractors adv. basic 

Enter 

Change with hold tax type: KB 

Change with hold tax code: KB 

Description: Sec 194C Contractors adv. Surcharge 

Enter 

Change with hold tax type: KC 

Change with hold tax code: KC 

Description: Sec 194C Contractors adv. Basic. Ed. Cess 

Enter 

Change with hold tax type: KD 

Change with hold tax code: KD 

Description: Sec 194C Contractors adv. Surcharge ed. Cess 

Enter & save 

Portray dependencies between with holding tax types: 

Path: Up to extended with holding tax path is same 

Calculation � with holding tax base amount � portray dependencies between 

with holding tax type 

159


Enter 

2% K1 45 KA 49 

0.2% K2 46 KB 50 

2% K3 47 KC 51 

2% K4 48 KD 52 

Use of the inherent base: incase of K3 &KD – Education cess is calculation on K1 & KA 

respective 

Select with hold tax type: K3 


Dependent on type No: 45 

Save 



Select K4, KC &KD 


For K4 – Dependent on type No: 46 

Select new entry button 

For KC – dependent on type No: 49 


For KD – Dependent on type No: 50 

Save 

Assign with holding tax types to company codes: 

Path: Up to extended with holding tax the path is same. 

Company code � assign with holding tax to company code 

160

Up to extended with holding tax the path is same. 

Basic setting � check recipient types 


Enter 


Give with holding tax: K1: Recipient: Co: Text: company 

With hold tax Recipient type Text 

K2 - CO - Company 



KA - CO - Company 

KB - CO - Company 

KC - CO - Company 

KD - CO - Company 



Maintain tax due dates: 

Path: Up to extended with holding tax the path is same 

Basic settings � India � Maintain tax due dates 



Official with holding tax key: 194C 

Recipient: Co (Company) 

No. of days until tax due date: 777 

And press F1 (For documentation) 

Save 

Assign with holding tax types to company codes: 


161

Company code � Assign with holding tax types to company codes 



With holding tax type: K1 

Recipient type: select Co 

Select with hold tax agent check box 

With hold tax obligated from 01.04.2006 

Obligated to with holding tax unit: 31.03.2007 

Save 



Select: K1 

Select: copy as button 

Change with holding tax type: K2 


Select K1 & K2 



Enter 




Select K1, K2, K3 &K4 

162


Change with holding tax type to KA 

Enter 

Once again change with holding tax type to: KB 

Enter 

Change with holding tax type: KC 

Enter 

Change with holding tax type: KD 


Activate extended with holding tax: 

Path: Same path 



Enter 

Select extended with holding tax check box for company code: AML 


Ignore the message: Press enter 


Creation of G/L Account TDS & Contractors and conversion changes 

Account: (FS00) 



163


Give the G/L Account: 100500 (Outstanding expenses) 


Enter 

Change short text & G/L Account long text: TDS & Contractors 

other fields are same 


Give the G/L Account: 400200 



Give the G/L Account No: 400100 (Salaries A/C) 


Enter 

Change the accounting groups to manufacturing 

Change short text & G/L A/C long text to conversion charges 



Assignment accounts for automatic postings: 

Up to extended with holding tax the path is same 

Postings � Accounts for with holding tax � Define accounts for with holding tax to be 

paid over 


Enter 

Select with hold tax code check box 

With hold tax type check box 

Save 

164

Give the with holding tax type with holding tax code Account 

K1 K1 100505 

K2 K2 100505 

K3 K3 100505 

K4 K4 100505 

KA KA 100505 

KB KB 100505 

KC KC 100505 

KD KD 100505 


Maintain company code settings for excise: 

Path: SPRO � Logistics general � Tax on goods movements � India � Basic settings 

� Maintain company code settings 



Save 


Maintain surcharge calculation methods: 


Calculation � India � surcharges � Maintain surcharge calculation methods 



Enter 

Select surcharges check box for AML 

Save 


Maintain surcharge Tax codes: (separate tax codes) : same path: 


Give the country: IN 

165


Country With holding tax type With holding tax code 

IN K2 K2 

IN KB KB 

Save & save in your request 

Maintain surcharge rates: (Surcharges combined with basic with holding tax codes) 

Same path 


Company with holding tax type with holding tax code recipient Surcharge 

AML K1 K1 CO 10 

AML KA KA CO 10 


Remittance Challan: To get TDS Payable line items co separately and others 

separately: 

Conversion changes A/C Dr 

To party A/C 

To TDS A/C 

TDS on contractors: 

Dr Cr 

TDS on Company: is 8000 

For companies (194C) 

TDS on contractors Dr 

1- 1000 - Company 

2 – 2000 - Others 

3 – 3000 - Company 

4 – 4000 - Company 

5 – 5000 - Others 

166

To Bank 

Specify document type for remittance challan 

Up to extended with holding tax the path is same 

Postings � India � Remittance challan � Document types � Specify document type 

(Accounts payable) 



Remittance challan document type: SA 

Save 


Maintain number groups: 

Same path 





Number group: 004 

Save 

Assign no ranges to number groups: 

Same path 


Number group: 004 

Internal No. range: 04 

Save 

Maintain No. ranges: 

Same path 

Select maintain Groups button 

Select group with out tax having 004 

From the menu select interval � maintain 


167

Enter 


Year: 2006: From number:1: to number: 100000 


Maintain number groups to TDS Certificates: 

Up to extended with holding tax path is same 

Postings � India � with holding tax certificates for vendors & customers � maintain 

number groups and SAP Script forms 





Give the form: J_ 1IEWT _ CERT 

No. group: 003 

Save 


Assign number ranges to number groups: 

Same path 


Give the number group: 003 

Internal No. range: 03 


Maintain number ranger: 

Same path 

Select maintain groups‟ button 

Select group without tax having 003 check box 

From the menu select interval � maintain 


168

Enter 


Year: 2006: From No: 100001 to No: 200000 


Assign tax codes in vendor master: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � accounts payable � master records � 

maintain centrally � change (XK02) 

Vendor No: 8700001 


Select with holding tax check box 

Enter 


With holding tax code: K1 

Select liable check box 

Recipient type: Co 











169



With hold tax type With holding tax code Liable Receipts type 

KA KA - Co 

KB KB - Co 

KC KC - Co 

KD KD - Co 

Press next page button ignore warning message 

Press enter 

Select CIN details button 

Ignore the warning messages, press enter 

Select with holding tax tab 

PAN: AP99876543C 

Select back arrow and save 

User level: 

Conversion charges posting (F-43) 


Type: KR 




Enter 



170


Text: conversion charges posting 


Account No: 400200 (Conversion charges A/C) 

Enter 

1 2 3 

If the values is less 

Than 20000 in the 

Whole year 

Remove: 

K1,K2,K3,K4,KA, 

KA,KB,KC,KD 

If the bill consists of 

Material 70000/- 

Conversion charges 

30000/- 

For K1,K2,K3,K4 – 

With holding tax base 

enter 30000 

3 rd Remove the codes KA, KB, KC & KD 

Enter 

Give the amount: „*‟ 


Text: „+‟ 

Document � Simulate 

Double click on 3 rd line item 


Select next item button 

Text once again „+‟ 

Select next item 

Text: „+‟ 

Select next item button 

171 

If the bill is only for 

conversion charges 

Remove KA,KB,KC,KD

Text: „+‟ 

Save 

From the menu select: Document display 

Double click on 3 rd line item: TDS on contractors 

It show the value date: 07.10.2006 

Creation of remittance Challan: 

Path: Accounting �Financial accounting � Accounts payable � with holding tax � 

India � extended with holding tax � remittance of with holding tax � create remittance 

challan 




Posting date: 01.09.2006 to 30.09.2006 

Sec 194C 

Recipient types: Co 


Posting date: 07.10.2006 

Bank account: 200105 (SBI Current account) 


Execute 

Give the text: TDS Payment for September 


Enter 

Double click on all the items 

Select document overview button 

172

Double click on SBI Current A/C 1/- 


Save 

Select clearing document button 

Enter bank challan: form 16A 

Same path: 



Challan clearing number: select 27 

Internal challan No & challan date will come automatically 

Bank challan No: 5678 (any no) 

Bank challan date: 07.10.2006 

Bank key: SBI 

Execute 

Print TDS Certificates: 

Up to extended with holding tax: the path is same (User level) 

With holding tax certified 

Print 




Section: 194C 

173

Posting date: 01.04.2006 to 31.03.2007 

Bank challan date: 01.05.2006 to 30.04.2007 

Certificate date: 30.04.2007 

Signatory: XYZ 

Designation: Manager - Accounts 

Place of printing: Hyderabad 

Execute 

Output device: LP01 

Select print button 

To view the print out from the menu select system � services � output control 

Execute 

Select spool no. check box 


Printing of annual return: 

Up to extended with holding tax the path is same (User level) 

Reporting � annual returns 

Give the income tax section: 194C 


Fiscal period: 01.04.2006 to 31.03.2007 

Extended with holding tax section 194C 


Tax deduction account number: AP9879876C 

Signatory: XYZ 

174

Designation of signatory: Manager-Accounts 

Date of signing: 30.04.2007 

Place: Hyderabad 

Execute 

Ignore the error message 

Give the tax deduction account No once again 

Execute 

Advance payment posting 

Advance payment: (F-48) 


Type: KZ 


Give the vendor A/C: 8700001 

Special G/L Indicator: A 

Bank A/C: 200105 


Amount: 200000 

Text: Advance payment posting 

Enter 



Business area: AMH: Due on date: 11.09.2006 

Text: „+‟ 

Document � simulate 

175

Enter 


Save 

Invoice posting: F-43 


Type: KR 




Amount: 5000001 


Business area: AMH: Billing date: 11.09.2006 

Text: conversion charges posting 


Account no: 400200 (conversion charges) 

Enter 

Remove KA, KB, KC& KD 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 

Document�simulate 



Save 

Transfer of advance from special G/L to normal by clearing special G/L items: 

(F-54): 


Type: KA 


Vendor A/C: 8700001 

Inv: 100007 (comes default) 

176

Text: advance payment clearing 


Give the transfer posting: 200000 



This is also a subsidiary ledger 

Asset accounting 

Chart of depreciation. All the setting are done here 

Copy Germany chart of duplication (Client 800) (or) 

Copy Germany (or) India (when client 000) 

Depreciation areas: 

Book depreciation 

Tax depreciation 

Costing depreciation 

Group depreciation 

Depreciation methods: 

Straight line depreciation (SLM) 

Written down value depreciation (WDV) 

Depreciation key: Rate + Method 

Ex: 5% SLM (OR) 5% WDV 

Posting: 

70 – Asset debit 

75 – Asset credit 

Transaction type: 

177

100 external acquisitions 

110 In house production 

210 Retirement with revenue 

Data flow in asset accounting: 

178

Main asset will have sub No: 0 (zero) 

1 - (Main asset) 

1 – 1 

1 – 2 

1. All the times 

Account asset rules: 

1. Sub asset master is to created with reference to main asset master 

2. Main asset master is to be created with reference to asset class 

3. In asset class it is specified account determination 

4. For account determination we assign G/L Accounts based on nature of transaction. 


Example: Purchase of master: 

Motor A/C (Subsidiary ledger) Dr 

To Bank A/c 

Copy reference chart of Depreciation/Depreciation Areas: 

Path: SPRO � Financial accounting � asset accounting � organizational structures � 

copy reference chart of depreciation/depreciation areas 

Double click on copy reference chart of depreciation 

(Transaction code: FC08) 

From the menu select organizational object � copy 

179

Organizational object 

From chart of depreciation: select ODE (Maximum valuation: Germany 

To chart of depreciation: AML 

Enter 



Give the short depreciation � asset customization for AML 

Save 


It gives the message that: chart of depreciation to AML 

Enter 


Double click on specify description of chart of depreciation 


Give your chart of depreciation: AML 

Enter 

Change the description to chart of depreciation for AML 

Save 



Double click on copy/delete depreciation areas 


180

Enter 

Select depreciation areas: 03, 10, 15, 20, 31, 32, 41, and 51. 

From the menu select edit � delete 


Ignore all the warning messages and go on 

Press enter till you get the message data was saved 

Assign chart of depreciation to company code: (Transaction code: OAOB) 

Same path: 



Press enter 

For company code: AML –Assign chart of depreciation AML 

And save 


Specify account determination: 

Path: SPRO � Financial accounting � asset accounting � organizational structures � 

Asset classes � specify account determination. 


Account determination: 

Account 

determination 

Description 

AML 10000 Land 

181

AML 11000 Buildings 

AML 20000 Plant & Machinery 

AML 30000 Furniture & fixtures 

AML 31000 Vehicles 

AML 40000 Capital work in progress 



Create screen lay out rules: 

Path: Same path 

Select screen lay out 1000, 1100, 2000, 3000, 3100, 4000 


Change the name to 



Screen layout Description 

AML1 Land 

AML2 Buildings 

AML3 Plant & machinery 

AML4 Furniture & fixtures 

AML5 Vehicles 

AML6 Capital work in 

progress (WIP) 

Define number range interval: 

Same path (Transaction code: AS08) 





182

From No: to to No: 1 to 100000 

Enter 


No. range: 02 

Interval: 

From no To number 

From No: 

100001 To 200000 

Select interval button 03 200001 To 300000 Enter 




And save 

Define asset classes: 

Same path (Transaction code: OAOA) 


Asset class: AML 1000 (Free hold land) 

Short text: free hold land 

Account determinative select 10000 lands 

Screen layout rules: Select AML1 

No. Range: 01 

Select include asset under inventory data check box 

Purpose of include asset under inventory data: 

For verification of assets this is usual 

Select No. AVC (Asset under construction) or summary management of AVC Under 

status of AVC 


183



Asset class: AML 1100 (Factory building) 

Short text: factory buildings 

Account determination: AML 11000 (Buildings) 

Screen lay out rule: AML2 

No. range: 02 

Select include asset under inventory data check box 

Select No AVC (OR) Summary management of AVC 

Save 


Asset class: AML 2000 (Department A) 

Short text: department A 

Account determination: AML 20000 (Plant & machinery) 

Screen lay out rule: AML3 (Plant & machinery) 

No. range: 03 

Select: Include asset under inventory data check box 

Select no AVC (Or) Summary management of AVC radio button 

Save 


Asset class: AML 3000 (Furniture & Fixtures) 

Short text: Furniture & Fixtures 

Account determination: AML 30000 (Furniture & Fixtures) 

184

Screen layout rule: AML4 

No. range: 04 



Save 


Asset class: AML 3100 (vehicles - others) 

Short text: vehicles - others 

Account determination: AML 31000 

Screen layout rule: AML5 (Vehicles) 

No. range: 05 



Save 


Asset class: AML 4000 (capital work in progress - general) 

Account determination: AML 40000 

Screen layout rule: AML6 

No. range: 06 

De Select: Include asset under inventory 

Select line item settlement radio button 

Save 

185

Determine depreciation areas in the asset class: 

Path: SPRO � Financial accounting � asset accounting � valuation � determine 

depreciation areas in the asset class (Transaction code: OAYZ) 

Give the chart of depreciation: AML 

Enter 


Give the asset class: AML 1000 

Enter 

Select asset class: AML 1000 

Double click on depreciation areas folder 

Deselect deactivation check box for 01 (Book depreciation) 

Lay out: select 2000 (Depreciation on asset sub no level) 

For 02 – 2000 

For 30 also – 2000 



Explanation: 

For 01 

Land: & capital work in programs 

Capitalization date – required 

Depreciation rate – 0% 

Lay out 2000 - Depreciation on Asset sub no. level 

Machine No Sub No 

2004 if asset installed - Machine No. - 1 0 

2005 Addition - Motor - 1 1 

2006 Additions - Motor - 1 2 

Depreciation is calculation on sub no. only. 

186


The same procedure to be followed for asset class 

AML 1100 

AML 2000 

AML 3000 

AML 3100 

AML 4000 

Creation of 15 G/L Accounts: 

Fixed Assets Group: 

1. Land 

2. Building 

3. Plant & Machinery 

4. Furniture & Fixtures 

5. Vehicles 

6. Capital work in progress 

(Account N0. Range, 200000 – 200099, Sort key – 018 (Asset no), field status group: 

G067, Reconciliation type: for A/C type: Asset 

Depreciation: 

7. Accumulated depreciation – Building 

8. Accumulated depreciation – Plant & Machinery 

9. Accumulated depreciation – Furniture & Fixtures 

10. Accumulated depreciation – Vehicles 

187

(Under accumulated depreciation group range: 100200 to 100299, sort key – 018 

(Asset No field status group – GO67 reconciliation A/C for account type: Asset) 

Sales: 

11. Asset Sale - Field Status Group – G052 

12. Profit on Asset Sale – Field Status Group – G001 

Under other Income: No. Range 300100 to 300199: Sort Key -018 

13.Loss on sale 

14. Loss due to scrapping 

Under Administration: Range: 400300 to 400399: Sort Key: 018 

Field Status group – G001 

15. Depreciation -Under Depreciation – Range 400500 to 400599 

Sort key:018; field status group – G001. 

Creation of G/L Masters: (FS00) 

Give the G/L account no: 200000 



Give the G/L Account No: 200110 (Sundry debtors) – used because it is a reconciliation 

Account 


Enter 

Changed the accounts group: Fixed assets 

Short text: Land 


188

Reconciliation A/C type for A/C type: Select Assts 

Sort key: select 018 (Asset No) 


Field status group: G067 

Save 






Enter 


Change short text & long text (Buildings) 

Save 





Enter 

Short text and G/L Account long text: Plant & Machinery 

Save 





189

Enter 

Short text and G/L Account long text: Furniture & Fixtures 

Save 





Enter 

Change Short text and G/L Account long text: Vehicles 

Save 





Enter 

Change Short text and G/L Account long text: Capital work in progress 

Save 




Give the G/L Account N0: 200000 

Enter 

Change the account group: Accumulated depreciation 

Change short text & Long text: Accumulated depreciation – buildings 

Save 



190



Enter 

Change short text & Long text: Accumulated depreciation – Plant & Machinery 

Save 




Enter 

Change short text & G/L Account Long text to: Accumulated depreciation – Furniture & 

Fixtures 

Save 





Enter 

Change short text & G/L Account Long text to: Accumulated depreciation – Vehicles 

Save 



191


Give the G/L Account N0: 300100 (Exchange gains) 

Enter 

Change short text & G/L Account long text: Asset sale 


Give sort key: 018 (Asset number) 


Field status group: select G052 

Save 





Enter 


Change short text & G/L Account long text to: Profit on Asset sale 


Give sort key: 018 (Asset number) 

Save 




192


Enter 


Change short text & G/L Account long text to: Loss on Asset sale 


Give sort key: 018 

Save 





Enter 

Change short text & long text to: Loss due to scrapping 

Save 





Enter 

Change the account group: Depreciation 

Change short text & G/L Account long text to: Depreciation 


193

Save 

Assignment of accounts for automatic postings: 

Path: SPRO � Financial accounting � asset accounting � integration with the general 

ledger � assigns G/L Accounts (Transaction code: A090) 


Enter 

Select chart of accounts: AML 

Double click on account determination folder 

Select account determination: AML 10000 (Land) 

Double click on balance sheet accounts folder 

Acquisition column 

Acquisition and production cost: 200000(A/C No) 

Loss made on asset retirement with out revenue: 400303 (A/C No) 

Clearing account revenue from asset sale: 300102 (Asset sale A/C) 

Gain from asset sale – 300103 (Profit on sale A/C) 

Loss from Asset sale – 400302 (Loss on sale of asset) 

Select and save 

It gives the warning message, ignore the message 

Press enter 


Double click on A/C determination folder 

Select: AML 11000(Buildings) 

Double click on balance sheets A/Cs folder 

194

Acquisition column: Acquision and production cost: 200005 

Loss made on asset retirement with out revenue: 400300 

Clearing account revenue from asset sale: 300102 

Gain from asset sale: 300103 

Loss from asset sale: 400302 

Save, ignore the message 

Enter 

Double click on depreciation folder 

Acc. Dep. Account for ordinary depreciation: 100200 

Expense account for ordinary depreciation: 400500 



Double click on Account determination folder: 

Select: AML 20000 (Plant & Machinery) 

Double click on balance sheet A/Cs folder 

Acquisition column: acquisition and production cost: 200010 




Loss on asset sale: 400302 

Save, ignore the message, and enter, save in your request 


Acc. Dep. Account for ordinary depreciation: 100205 

Expense account for ordinary depreciation: 400500 

195

Save, save in your request 


Select AML: 30000(Furniture & Fixtures) 

Double click on balance sheet folder 

Acquisition: acquisition any production cost: 200015 





Select save button (ctrl + s) = ignore the message 

Press enter 


Accumulated depreciation A/C for ordinary dep: 100210 

Expenses account for ordinary depreciation: 400500 




Select AML 31000(Vehicles) 

Double click on balance sheet A/C folder 

Acquisition: Acquisition production cost: 200020 




196


Select save button (or) (ctrl + s), ignore the message, and press enter 

Double click on depreciation folders 

Accumulate depreciative A/C for ordinary depreciation: 100215 

Expenses account for ordinary depreciation: 400500 




Select AML 40000 (Capital work in progress) 

Double click on balance sheet folder 

Acquisition: acquisition production cost: 200025 





Select save button (or) (ctrl + s), ignore the message 

Press enter 

Specify document type for posting of depreciation: 

Path: SPRO � Financial accounting � asset accounting � Integration with the general 

ledger � post depreciation to the general ledger � specify document type for posting of 

depreciation. 

Double click define document types 


Give the document type: AF (Depreciation posting) 

197

Enter 

Select AF depreciation postings 







No. range: 04 

Year: 2006 

From no: 700001 to 800000 

Select external check box 


Advantage of selection of external check box: 

In every month it automatically calculates the depreciation. 

Example: 1) Depreciation A/C Dr 

To Accumulated Depreciation - building 

2) Depreciation A/C Dr 

To Accumulated depreciation - plant & machinery 


To Accumulated depreciation – Furniture & Fixtures 


To Accumulated depreciation – Vehicles 

(It automatically calculated depreciation at a time and give the no ranges 

automatically) 

198

Specify intervals and posting rules: 

Same path (Transaction code: OAYR) 

Select company code: AML 

Double click on posting rules folder 

Select 01 (Book depreciation) 


Select monthly postings radio button 

Save 

Specify rounding of net book value and /or depreciation: 

SPRO � Financial accounting � Asset accounting � Valuation � amount 

specifications (Company code/depreciations area) � specify rounding of net book value 

and /or depreciation (Transaction code: OAYO) 


Double click on rounding specification folder 

Select 01 (Book depreciation) 


Select automatically calculated depreciation check box 

Select round to nearest whole radio button 

Save 


Define screen lay out for asset master data: 

Path: SPRO � Financial accounting � asset accounting � Master data � screen lay 

out � define screen lay out for asset master data 

Double click on define screen lay out for asset master data 

Select AML1 (Land) 

Double click on logical field groups 

199

Select 2 (Posting information) 

Double click on field group rules 

Capitalization date: Make it required entry field 

Select main no. check box 

Select sub no. check box 

Select copy check box 



Select: 3 (time dependent data) 

Double click on fields group rules folder 

Business area: Make it required entry field 

Select main No. Check box 

Select sub no. check box 

Select copy: check box 

Save 


The same procedure is to be followed lay out AML2, Layout AML3, Layout AML4, 

AML5, & AML6 

Define screen lay out for asset depreciation areas: 

Same path: (Transaction code: A021) 

Select screen layout 2000 (dep. on asset sub no. lay out) 

Double click on field rules folder 

Depreciation keys: make it required entry field 

200

Select main No: check box 

Select sub No: check box: select copy check box 


Depreciation keys: Rate + Method 

a. Define base methods 

b. Define declining balance methods 

c. Define multi level methods 

d. Define period control methods 

e. Maintain depreciation key: assigned (Assigned to asset master) 

Note: a,b,c,d assigned to main depreciation key 

a. Define base methods: 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Asset accounting � Depreciation � Valuation 

methods � Depreciation key � Calculation methods � Define base methods. 

Note down: Base method: 0014 (ordinary: explicit it percentage (after end of life)) 

b. Define declining balance methods: 

Same path 


Enter 

Note down: 001 (0.00X/0.000%/0.000% 

If the 002 

Decimal factor 2% 

Maximum: 20% 

If the depreciation is 5%: value of the asset is 100000/- 

1 st 4 years: 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 = 20% 

Depreciation is = 100000 * 5/100 * 98/100 

201

Define multi level methods: 

Same path: (Transaction code: AFAMS) 


Multi level method: A1 

Description: 5% SLM (Straight line method) 

Validity start: Select from ordinary depreciation start date 

Save 


Double click on levels button 


Acquisition year: 9999 

Years: 999 

Periods: 12 

Base value: select 01 (Acquision value) 

Percentage: 5% 

Save 

Acquision year: 9999 (Any year acquision) 

Year: 999 (Maximum No. of years) 

Period: 12 (12 months) 

Base value: acquision value + purchase cost 

Percentage: Rate of depreciation 

Reduction: Ex: Book value: 100000 

Rate of depreciation – 5% 

Residual values – 5% of book value 

Book value = 100000 

5% Residual value = 5000 

(Scrap value) ----------- 

202

95000 

------------ 

5% depreciation on 95000/- only 



Give the multi level method: A2 

Description: 5% WDV 

Validity start: select from ordinary depreciation start data 

Save 

Double click on levels folder 


Acquision year: 9999 

Years: 999 

Periods: 12 

Base value: select 24 (net book value) 

Percentage: 5% 


Maintain period control methods: 

Same path: (Transaction code: AFAMP) 


203

Period control method: 006 

Description of the method: 01/06/06/06 

Acquision year: select 01 (Prorate at period start date) 

Added year: select 06 (At the start of the year) 

Retirement year: select 06 at the start of the year 

Transfer: select 06 (at the start of the year) 



Maintain depreciation key: 

Same path: (Transaction code: AFAMA) 


Give the depreciation key: AML (5% straight line depreciation method) 

Select period controls according to fiscal year check box 

Select depreciation to the day check box 




Double click on assignment of calculation methods folder: 


Depreciation type: select ordinary depreciation 

204

Phase: select from the start of depreciation 

Base method: select 0014 

Dec. balance method: select 001 


Multilevel method: A1 

Class: select straight line depreciation 

Save 


Select depreciation key: AML1 

Select activate button 



Dep. Key: AML2 (5% written down value method) 

Select period control according to year check box 

Select depreciation to the check box 

Save 


Double click on assignment of calculation methods folder 


Dep. type: select order depreciation 

Phase: select from the start of depreciation 

Base method: select 0014 

Define balance method: select 001 

205


Multilevel method: select A2 

Class: declining balance depreciation 

Save 


Select depreciation key: AML2 

Select activate button 

Select page up 

Select depreciation key: 000: select activate button 

And save 

User level: 

Creation of main asset master: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � fixed assets � asset � create � asset 

(AS01) 

Give asset class: AML 2000 (Department A) 


Enter 

Give the description: Machine No: 1 

Capitalization date: capitalized on 15-04-2006 

Select time dependent tab 

Give the business area: AMH 

Select depreciation area tab 

Dep. Key: select AML1 

Give the useful life: 15 years: periods: 4 months (only for information) 

Ordinary depreciation started – 15.04.2006 


Creation of sub asset master: 

206

Path: Accounting � financial accounting � Fixed assets � Assets � Create � Sub 

number � Asset (AS11) 

Give the asset no: 200001 


Enter 

Change the description to motor 

Capitalized on 25/09/06 

Select item dependent tab 

Select description areas tab 

Only for testing: Depreciation key: AML2 

Ordinary depreciation start date: 25.09.2006 


Main asset purchase posting: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � fixed assets � posting � acquisition � 

external acquisition � with vendor (F-90) 

Give the document date: posting date: 15.04.06 

Type: KR 




Enter 

Ignore the warning message, press enter 



Text: main asset purchase posting 

Posting key: 70 (debit asset) 

Account: 200001 – 0 

Transaction type: select, 100 (External asset acquision) 

Enter 

Remove TDS codes 

Enter 


Text: „+‟ 


Sub asset purchase posting (F-90) 

207


Type: KR 



Give the account N0: 8700001 

Enter 



Text: sub asset purchase posting 


Account No: 200001 – 1 

Transaction type: 100 

Enter 

Remove TDS tax codes 

Enter 


Text: „+‟ 


Report to view year wise, sub asset wise values: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Fixed assets � Asset � Asset explores 

(AW01N) 

Give the asset No. 200001 – sub No: 0 

Enter 

Select display depreciation calculative button 


Select comparisons tab 

Give the fiscal year: 2007 

Enter 

Select display depreciation calculation button 

208

Report to view for all assets for a particular period 

Path: Accounting � financial Accounting � fixed assets � Information system � 

reports on asset accounting � asset balances � balance lists � asset balances � by 

business area (S _ LAR _ 87011965) 

Press all selections button 


Give the report date: 30.07.2006 

Execute 

Double click on department A 

Double click on machine No. 1 

It goes to the asset explores 



Give the report date: 30.04.2006 

Execute 

Double click on dept: A 

Depreciation run: 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Fixed Assets � Periodic Processing � 

depreciation run � execute (AFAB) 



Posting period: 1 

Select planned posting radio button 

Select test run check box 

209

Execute 

Ignore the message, select yes button 


Deselect test run check box 

From the menu select program � execute in back ground 

Enter 

To schedule in the nights � date/Time button 

Give date & time 


To run immediately 

Select immediate button 


It gives the message back ground job was scheduled for programs RAPOST 200 

To check whether the job is complete (or) not 

System � services � jobs � job over view 


To view the document use the transaction code: FB03 

Select document list button 


Document type: AF 

Execute 

Double click on document no. 

210

Use the transaction code: AFAB 

Repeat: To run depreciation once again for a month – depreciation will be posted for the 

asset where depreciation is not poster in the first run 

Restart: when the server is down 

Unplanned posting run: posting not as per plan (Monthly posting) 

Asset sale: 

To check field status group: (G052) 

Use the transaction code: 0BC4 

Select the field status variant: AML 

Double click field status group folder 

Select field status group: G052 

And double click 

Double click on asset accounting 

Make asset retirement field – required entry field 

Save 


Asset sale: 

Accounting � Financial accounting � fixed assets � posting � retirement � 

retirement with revenue � with customer (F-92) 



Type: Dr 



211

Customer No: 6200001 

Enter 

Give amount: 501000/- 


Text: Asset sale 


Account No: 300102 (Asset sale) 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 


Select asset retirement check box 

Enter 

Give asset No: 200001 

Sub No: 0 

Transaction type: 210 comes by default (retirement with revenue) 

Asset value date: 01.05.2006 

Select complete retirement check box 


212

System passes the entry Asset Sale ( 200001 -0) 

01 Customer A/c 501000 

70 Acc dep on p&machinery 1096 

40 Asset Sale 501000 

50 Asset sale 501000 

75 Plant & Machinery 500000 

50 profit on asset sale 2096 

Select Save Button 

Asset Transfer: 

Asset – 200001 – 0 

Acquisition value - 500000 

Accumulated Depr - 1096 

------------ 

Net Book value on 30.04.06 498904 

------------ 

Transfer to asset form Hyd Business area to Bangalore Business area 

200001 – 0 Asset transfer to Bangalore business area Transfer Gross Block & 

accumulated depreciation 

a) create a new asset 

master in Bangalore 

business area (AS01) 

& 

b) Transfer values 

Purchase 500000 

Acc.Depreciation on 30.04.2006 1096 

----------- 

Net book value on 30.04.06 498904 

Asset sale 501000 

---------- 

Profit on asset sale 2096 

------------ 

(Or) Create and transfer in one 

step 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Fixed Assets � Posting � Transfer � 

Transfer with in company code (ABUMN) 

213


Enter 

Give the asset No: 200001 

Sub No: 0 



Text: Asset transfer 

Select new asset radio button 

Description: Machine No: 50 

Asset class: AML 2000 

Select master data button 

Give the business area: AMH (Bangalore business area) 

Select additional data tab 

Give the capitalized on 01.05.2006 

Select depreciation area tab 

Give the useful life: 15 Years: period: 3 Months 



Enter 

Save 

To view the document (FB03) 

Give the document No: 28 (28 is document no. that is out come of previous step) 


214


Enter 

Asset scrapping: 

If Motor: 200001 – 1 – Scrap M 30/09/2006 

To check sub asset value as on 30/09/2006 

Use the transaction code(S _ ALR _ 8701 1965) 

Press all selections button 



Report date: 30.09.2006 

Execute 

Double click on department A 

Path for asset scrapping: 

Accounting � Financial accounting � Fixed assets � Posting � Retirement � Asset 

retirement by scrapping (ABAVN) 

Give the asset No: 200001 – sub No: 1 



Asset value date: 01.10.2006 

Text: Asset Scrapping 

Save 

Go and see the document –(FB03) 




Enter 

215

Capital work in progress line item settlement: 

Capital work in progress: 

Machinery 

Loading & Unloading 

Freight 

Commission 

Prepare XLS File: 

GL Masters – FS00 

Vendor Masters – XK01 

Customer masters – XD01 

Asset masters – AS01 

Material Masters – MM01 

Data take over 

(XLS file is converted on to text file. It uploads to SAP in to 

↓ ↓ 

LSMW BDC 

(Legacy system migration work Branch) (Batch data Communication) 

(Done by Functional Consultant) (Done by ABA Pars) 

Account 

No 

Company 

Code 

A/C 

Group 

100000 AML Share 

Capital 

100000 AML Share 

Capital 

P & L BS Short 

Text 

- X Eq. 

Share 

216 

Capital 

- X Pref. 

Share 

capital 

Long 

text 

Eq. 

Share 

Capital 

Pref. 

Share 

capital 

Difference between normal A/C Data take over and SAP data take over: 

a. In SAP – Subsidiary Ledger concept 

All accounts are in G.L – Normal 

b. Inventory Accounting – SAP 

Purchase Accounting – Normal 

c. Consumption entries will be posted in SAP 

Balancing figure consumption – Normal Accounting 

i.e. Opening stock XXX

Add: Purchase XXX 

Loss: Consumption XXX 

-------- 

Closed stock XXX 

-------- 

d. SAP Accounting – Closing stock will be shown material, 

quality, rate and value. We can not get material wise, 

Quality, rate and value for closing stock – Normal value 

e. For Assets – we get assets register showing quality, 

capitalization date, location – Asset register in SAP 

Out side system – Normal 

f. Each sub asset wise – we get gross block and accumulated 

depreciation in SAP. 

Total plant & machinery – Gross block and accumulated 

Depreciation – Normal Accounting 

g. For vendor and customers open item wise – in SAP 

Not possible to see payable items separately in normal 

accounting 

Steps to follow 

a) To close the Accounts in normal accounting up to a period, take balances in 

SAP instead of taking transactional data. 

b) Create 5 Dummy Accounts 

i) G/L Clearing Account 

ii) Vendor clearing Account 

iii) Customers clearing Account 

iv) Asset clearing Account 

v) Stock taking Account 

(It can be under any Account group – we create under liabilities) 

c) Once we upload all balances the above 5 accounts should be zero – If any 

values are there in the account – the data take over is wrong. 

d) We shall not enter day to day data in production client before taking the 

balances. 

Share Capital 500000 

Party X (Creditor) 100000 

Acc: depreciation Machine No: 15 (P & M) 200000 

Sales 400000 

Fixed Assets: Plant & machinery Mac 

N0:156 

300000 

217

Party A/C (Debtors) 200000 

Cash Account 250000 

Inventory (finished goods) 100000 

Raw material Consumption 350000 

TOTAL 1200000 1200000 

a) G/L Clearing A/C Dr 1200000 

To Equity share capital 500000 

To Vendor Clearing 100000 

To Asset clearing 200000 

To Sales 400000 

b) Asset clearing A/C Dr 300000 

Customer clearing A/C Dr 200000 

Cash A/C Dr 250000 

Stock taking A/C Dr 100000 

Raw material consumption A/C Dr 350000 

To G/L Clearing A/C 1200000 

G/L Clearing balance = 0 

c) Vendor clearing A/C Dr 100000 

To party x – 1 20000 

To party x – 2 70000 

To party x – 3 30000 

(Here the vendor A/C is not cleared i.e. Debit & Credits are not equal. Hence we 

will check only vendor A/C rather than all A/C Accounts) and you can pass the 

rectification entries. i.e. 

Vendor clearing A/C Dr 100000 

To party x – 1 20000 

To party x – 2 70000 

To party x – 3 10000 

d) Party A/C – A – Bill No: 1 80000 

Party A/C – A – Bill No: 2 180000 

To Customer clearing A/C 200000 

Now customer A/C becomes 0 (zero) 

218

For Assets: 

e) i) To make fixed assets – Plant & Machinery G/L Account and accumulated 

depreciation – Plant & Machinery G/L Accounts as non reconciliation A/Cs and pass 

40 Plant & Machinery A/C Dr 300000 

50 Accumulated depreciation P&M 200000 

50 Asset clearing 100000 

ii) Go to ‘AS92’ and take over each sub asset wise gross block and accumulated 

depreciation – It will not update G/L, since we removed assets reconciliation type in G/L 

Masters. 

iii) To make fixed assets plant & machinery G/L Account and accumulated depreciation 

plant & machinery G/L A/C as reconciliation A/C in customization. 

Asset creation and take over values (AS92) 

AS91 (Creation of master) 

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ 

(AS01) (AS91) (Box) (LSMW) 

AS92 – Change assets and take over values 

Creation of asset master (AS01) 

Give the asset class AML 2000 


Select master data button 

Description: Machine No: 15 

Give the capitalized on: 15.05.2004 

Select time – Dependent tab 


Select depreciation areas tab 

Give the depreciation key: AML1 

219

Useful life: 10 years 4 months 


Save 

Path for ‘AS92’ to takeover values 

SPRO � Financial accounting � asset accounting � asset data transfer � manual on 

line transfer � create/change/display legacy asset (Transaction code: AS92) 

Double click on change legacy asset 

Asset No: 200003 

Sub No: 0 


Select take over values button 

Ignore the warning messages – Enter 

Give cumulative depreciation value – 300000 

Accumulated ordinary depreciation – 200000 

Enter 


Path to make fixed assets plant & machinery G/L Account and Accumulated depreciation 

plant & machinery A/C as reconciliation Account. 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Asset accounting � Preparing for production 

start up � Production start up � Reset reconciliation account 


220

Double click on change control of reconciliation Account folder 

From the menu select edit � selections � select all 

Select set reconciliation account indicator for all account 


For Materials: 

a) Preparing a statement showing Material No. qty, rate & total & amount 

Material No Quality Rate Amount 

1 50 200 10000 

2 250 100 25000 

3 6500 10 65000 

----------- 

Total 100000 

----------- 

b) Create Material Mater and enter in standard price field rate: (material person 

work) 

c) Use the transaction code: MB1C 

Movement type: 561 

Plant: HYD 

Material No: Quality 

1 50 

2 250 

3 6500 

System pass the entry automatically 

Inventory finished goods Dr 100000 - BSX 

To Stock taking 100000 - GBBBSA 

221

Now stock taking becomes „0‟ (zero) 

In the year ending what steps we have to do 

We do in the last week of March 

Closing Procedure 

To carry forward vendor & customer balances to next year 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Accounts Payable � Periodic processing 

� Closing � carry forward � Balance carry forward (F-07) 


Carried forward to fiscal year: 2007 

Select: select customers check box 

Select: select vendors check box 


Select detail log check box 

Execute 

Ignore the warning message � Enter 

It show each vendor & customer balance carry forward to next year 

It is one time exercise in each year 

222

Asset Account: 

You have to open only 2 years accounts at a time 

To check which year close for Asset Accounting 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Fixed assets � Periodic processing � 

Year end closing � Undo � Entire company code (T. Code OAAQ) 



Enter 

To close year 2006 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � Fixed assets � Periodic processing � year 

end closing � Execute (T. Code AJAB) 


Fiscal year to be closed: 2006 


From the menu select � execute in background 

Enter 



It gives message background job was scheduled for program RAJABS00 

To check whether the job is complete or not 

From the menu select system � Services � Jobs � Job overview 

Execute 

To view the result of the job 

Select job RAJABS00 

223

Select spool button 



To close any year for Assets, we have to run depreciation 

For all assets for all periods, then only system close the balance 

To Open 2007 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Fixed Assets � Periodic processing � 

Fiscal year change (T. Code: AJRW) 


New fiscal year: 2007 


From the menu select program � Execute in back ground 

Enter 



It gives the message background job was schedule for program „RAJAWE00‟ 

To check whether the job is completer or not 

From the menu select system � services � jobs � job overview 

Execute 

Select the job RAJAWE00 

224

Select spool button 



To carry forward G/L balances 

Path: Accounting � Financial accounting � General ledger � periodic processing � 

Closing � carry forward � balances carry forward (F-16) 

Ledger: select 0 


Carry forward to fiscal year: 2007 


Select output list of results check box 

Select balances in retain earnings Accounts check box 

Execute 

Select retained earning account button 


Select balance sheet Accounts button 

Copy no. range intervals for next year 

Path: SPRO � Financial Accounting � Financial Accounting Global setting � 

Document � Document number ranges � Copy to fiscal year 

Ignore the message press enter (Transaction code: OBH2) 


To fiscal year under source fiscal year details: 2006 

To fiscal year under target fiscal year details: 2007 

Execute 

225

Ignore the message select „yes‟ button 

Open posting periods 

SPRO � Financial accounting � Financial accounting global settings � document � 

posting periods � open and close posting periods 


Give the posting period variant: AML 

Enter 

For fiscal year variant: AML 

From period 1: 1 

Year: 2007 

From period 2: 12 

Year: 2006 

To period: 12 

Year: 2006 

Save 


How to open special periods 

Same path: 0B52 

For fiscal year variant: AML 

From period 2 is 13 

Year: 2006 

To period is 13 

Year: 2006 

226

Save 

Posting to special periods(F-02) 

Give the document date & posting date: 26.03.2007 

Type: SA 



Account No: 400100 (Salaries account) 

Enter 

Ignore the warning message enter 

Change the period to: 13 

Enter 

Ignore the warning message, enter 



Text: salary provision 


Account No: 100500 (out standing expenses) 

Enter 



Text: „+‟ 


227

Go and see the G/L Account: (FS10N) 




Execute 

How to create a folder 

Keep the cursor on favorites 

Reports 

From the menu select favorites � restart folder 

Give the folder name: FI Reports 

Enter 

How to assign reports to folder 

Keep the cursor on FI Results folder 

From the menu select favorites � insert transaction 

Give the transaction S_ALR_87011965 (Asset balances results) 

Enter 

Double click on asset balances report 

228

How to attach report on desk top 

Go to the report 

Select generate a short cut on desk top button 

Select description: select sap class 

Enter 

Select „O.K‟ button 

Log off the system 

Double click on SAP Asset balances icon 

Give the pass: enter 

Chart of Accounts 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General ledger � Information system � 

General ledger reports � Master data � Chart of Accounts � Chart of Accounts (T. 

Code S_ALR_87012326) 

Give the Chart of Accounts: AML 

Execute 

5) Trial Balance: 

Path: Up to General ledger reports the path is same 

Accounts Balances � Korea (Country) � Trial Balance (South Korea) 

T. Code: S_ALR_87012310 


Execute 

Ignore the warning message – Press enter 

Select current layout button 

229

Keep the fields – G/L Account No 

G/L Account Log text 

Closing Balance 

Enter 

To down load to excel 

From the Menu select list � Exports � Spread sheet 

Enter, select table radio button 

Enter, enter once again 

6) Ledger: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � General Ledger � Periodic Processing � 

Closing � Document � Balance audit trial � All Accounts � General Ledger from the 

document file (T. Code S_ALR_87100205) 


Execute 

Select the current layout button 

Keep the fields document numbers posting date 

Other fields you can hide 

From the hidden fields column select 

Debit amount is local currency 

Credit amount is local currency 

Select cumulative balance field 

Select text fields 

Select left arrow 

Change the column positions 

Document number should be 1 

230

Posting date should be 2 

Test should be 3 

Debit amount in LC should be 4 

Credit amount in LC should be 5 

Cumulative balance 6 

Select total check box for debit amount in LC, Credit amount in LC 


Double click on document number 

From the menu select settings � Layout � Save 

(To save the layout) 

7) Vendor list: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Accounts Payable � Information system 

� Reports for Accounts payable accounting � Master data � Vendors list 

(T. Code S_ALR_87012086) 


Select address and telecom master check box 

Execute 

8) Vendor wise Purchases 

Up to reports for Accounts payable Accounting the path is same 

� Vendor balances � Vendor business 

(T. Code S_ALR_87012093) 


Execute 

9) Outstanding list of Vendors: 

231

Up to reports for Assets Payable Accounting. The path is same 

Vendors items � use of vendor open items for printing 

(T. Code S_ALR_87012083) 


Execute 

10) Age wise Analysis 

Up to reports for Accounts Payable Accounting the path is same 

Vendors � Items � Vendor payment history (With 01 sorted list) 

(T. Code S_ALR_87012085) 


Summarization level enter „0‟ 

Select days over due sorted list check box 

Execute 

11) Advance Payment report 

Up to reports for Accounts Payable Accounting the path is same 

Vendor Items � List of down payment open on key date � vendor 

(T. Code S_ALR_87012105) 


Execute 

12) Depreciation fore case: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Fixed Assets � Information system � 

Reports on Assets Accounting � Depreciation fore cast � Depreciation on capitalization 

assets (Depreciation Simulation) 

(T. Code S_ALR_ 87012936) 


232

Give the report date the last date up to which year we want to see the report (31.03.2009); 

2006, 2007, 2008 (31.03.2006) 

Execute 

13) Fixed Assets schedule as per companies Act 

Path: Information systems � Accounting � Financial Accounting � Fixed Assets � 

Assets History sheet (T. Code AR02) 


Report date: 31.03.2007 

Select group to only radio button 

Deselect use ALV grid check box 

Execute 

Select Assets button 

Double click on assets retirement 

Balance sheet & profit and loss A/C creation (Financial Statement version creation) 

(FSV) 

Any balance sheet, you have 3 levels 

1. Summary 

2. Schedule 

3. Accounts 

Liabilities: 

Share capital Equity share capital G/L Account No: 100000 

Pref. share capital G/L Account No: 100001 

100002 

It is button to create minimum 2 versions 

Client 000 � schedule VI format (BAIN) 

Client 800 � create new format 

233

Path for financial statement version creation: 

SPRO � Financial Accounting � general ledger accounting � business transactions � 

closing � documenting � define financial statement versions 


Financial statement version: AML 

Name: Balance sheet & profit & loss account 

Maintain language: select EN 

Select item keys automatic check box 

Give year chart of accounts: AML 

Save 


Select financial statement items button 

Keep the cursor on AML 

Select create items button 

Give the name: Balance sheet 

Profit & loss A/C 

Net profit/loss carried to balance sheet 

Enter 

Double click on no text exists against asset 

Give the item Assets 

Enter 

Keep the cursor on assets 

Press select button 

Keep the cursor on balance sheet, select reassign button 

234

Select subordinate radio button 

Enter 

Double click on No text against liabilities 

Give the item liabilities 

Enter 

Keep the cursor on liabilities 


Keep the cursor on balance sheet 

Select reassign button 


Enter 

Keep the cursor on profit & loss A/C 


Give the items: Income 

Expenditure 

Enter 

Keep the cursor on liabilities 


Give the items: Share capital 

Reserves & Surplus 

Secured Loans 

Unsecured Loans 

Enter 

Keep the Cursor on Assets 


Give the items: Net Fixed Assets 

Net Current Assets 

Miscellaneous Expenditure 

235

Enter 

Keep the cursor on Income 


Give the items: Sales 

Other income 

Increase/decrease in stocks 

Enter 

Keep the cursor on expenditure 


Give the items: Raw material consumption 

Personnel cost 

Manufacturing Expenses 

Administration 

Depreciation 

Interest 

Enter & save 


Double click on No test exist against net result profit 

Give the items: Net profit transferred from P & L A/C 

Enter 

Keep the cursor on net profit transferred from P & L A/C 


Keep the cursor on Reserves & Surplus 



Enter 

236

Double click on No text exist against net result loss 

Give the item: Net loss transferred from P & L A/C 

Enter 

Keep the cursor on net loss transfer from P & L A/C 


Keep the cursor on miscellaneous expenditure 



Enter 

Assignment of accounts 

Keep the cursor on share capital 

Select assign accounts button 

Give from Account: 100000 to 100099 

Select debit & credit check box 

From Account: 100101 to 100999: select debit & credit check box 

(Except 100100) 

Enter 

Keep the cursor on Net Fixed Assets: 




Enter 

237

Keep the cursor on Sales: 




Enter 

Keep the cursor on Raw material consumption 




Enter 

Keep the cursor on Net profit/Loss carried to balance sheet: 


Give the Account No: 100100 


Enter 

To check all the accounts have been assigned or not select check button 

Select non assigned accounts check box 

Enter 

Enter & Save 

Double click on Liabilities 

Start of Group: Liabilities 

End of Group: Total Liabilities 

Select display total check box 

Enter 

238

Double click on Share capital 

Start of Group: Sources of fund 

End of Group: Share capital 


Enter 

Double click on Reserves & Surplus 

End of Group: Reserves & Surplus 


Enter 

Double click on Assets 

Start of Group: Assets 

End of Group: Total Assets 


Enter 

Double click on Net Fixed Assets 

Start of Group: Application of funds 

End of Group: Net fixed Assets 


Enter 

Double click on miscellaneous expenditure 

End of Group: miscellaneous expenditure 


Enter 

Double click on profit & loss A/C 

Start of group: Profit & Loss A/C 


239

Double click on income 

Start of group: Income 

End of group: Total income 


Save 

Open the Balance Sheet (FSE2) – What we are created 

Give the financial Statement version: AML 

Execute 

Double click on sales 

End of group: Sales 


Enter 

Double click on expenditure 

Start of group: Expenditure 

End of group: Total expenditure 

Select display Total check box 

Enter 

Double click on raw material consumption 

End of group: Raw Material Consumption 


Enter 

Double click on net profit/loss carried balance sheet 

240

End of group: Net profit/loss carried to balance sheet 


Enter 

Double click on no text exist against P&L result 

Give the item: Net Profit/Loss carried to Balance Sheet 

End of group: Net Profit/Loss carried to Balance Sheet 


Enter & Save 


Open one more session to view the Balance sheet 

Accounting � Financial Accounting � General ledger � Information system � 

General Ledger reports � Balance sheet/profit and loss statement/Cash flow � General 

� Actual/Actual comparisons � Balance/Profit and loss statement (S_ALR_87012284) 



Financial statement version: AML 

Reporting year: 2006 

Reporting periods: 1 to 16 

Comparison year: 2005 

Comparison periods: 1 to 16 

Select classical list radio button 

Select special evaluations tab 

Balance sheet type: select 1 (standard financial statement) 

Select output control tab 

241

Company code: summarization: select 1 (Balance sheet per company code) 

Business area summarization: select 1 (Balance sheet per Business area) 

Summary report: enter 3 

Comparison type: select 1 

Scaling: select 5/2 

Execute. 

G.L Master – FS00 

Vendor Masters – XK01 

Customer Masters – XD01 

Asset Masters – AS01 

Material Masters – MM01 

Open Excel 

a. Full Rupee with paisa: 0/2 

b. Only rupees � 0/0 

c. Rupees. In Lakhs (no thousands in decimal) – 5/0 

d. Rupees in Lakhs, thousands in decimals – 5/2 

e. Rupees in Millions – No decimals – 6/0 

f. Rupees in Crores - no decimals – 7/0 

g. Rupees in Crores – Lakhs in decimals – 7/2 

LSMW 

242

Fields Required: 

G.L Account No 

Company code 

Account Group 

Whether P&L Account 

Whether Balance Sheet Account 

Short text 

Long text 

Account currency 

Only balances in local currency 

Line item display 

Sort key 

Field status group 

For each field there is a technical name 

For each field note down technical name, type & length 

1 st Sheet 

In SAP (FS00) 



Keep the cursor on G/L Account No, press F1 

Select technical information button 

Double click on field name 

Copy the technical name in Excel: SAKNR 

Technical name Type Length 

G/L Account No SAKNR C 10 

Company code BUKRS C 4 

Select back arrow in SAP 

243

Keep the cursor on Account group 

Press F1 

Select technical information button 


Copy technical name: KTOKS in Excel 

Type: C Length: 4 

Copy: XPLACCI Technical name of P&L A/C 


Copy: XBILK Technical name of Balance sheet 


For G/L Account short text: copy TXT20 - ML 


Copy: TXT50 – TX – Long text technical name 


Select back arrow in SAP.FS00 

Keep the cursor on Account Currency 

Press F1 Select technical information button 


Copy in Excel: WAERS 

Type: C 

Length: 5 

Copy: XSALH only balances in local currency 

Type: C 

244

Length: 1 

For line item display: copy XKRES 


For sort key: copy: ZUAWA 


For field status group: FSTAG 


Save Excel file 

Create new Excel File 

Keep only one sheet 

In SAP go to OBD4 (Account Group) 

Copy: SCPL (Share Capital for 1 st Account) 

Copy: CASI (Current Assets) 

Copy: SALE (Sales) 

Copy: RMCN (Raw Material Consumption) 

Select SALE, RMCN (Give x) for P&L 

SCPL, CASI (Give x) for Balance sheet A/C 

2 nd Sheet: see there is no other sheet (only one sheet) 

Select the sheet (in Excel) 

Select right mouse button 

Select format cells 

245

Select text 

Select O.K button 

From the menu select file � save as 

Save the type: select text (Tab delimited) 

Give the file name: AML Text 

Save 

Select yes button 

Close excel 

G/L A/c 

NO 

Co 

code 

A/C 

Group Whether Whether Short Text Long Text Account 

P& Balance 

LossA/c Sheet Currency 

100001 AML SCPL x Pref. Share capital 

Pref. Share 

capital INR 

200101 AML CAST x INR 

300002 AML SALE X INR 

400001 AML RMCN X INR 

Only line 

Field 

Bal 

in Loc 

Item Sort Status 

Cur Display key Group 

x x 1 G001 

x x 1 G005 

x x 1 G001 

x x 1 G001 

Use the Transaction code: LSMW in SAP 

Project Name: AML 

Sub Project: AML 

246

Object: AML 

Select credit entry button 


Once again create entry button 

Give the description G/L up loading 

Enter 

Description for sub project also: G/L up loading 

Object also: G/L up loading 

Enter 

Select execute button (or) continue button 

Execute once again 

Select display/change button 

Select batch input recording radio button 

From the menu select go to � Recording over view 

Select create recording button 

Give the recording name: AMLGL 

Description: GL Master 

Enter 

Give the transaction code: FS00 

Enter 



From the menu select G/L Account � create 

247

Give the account group: share capital 

Select balance sheet account radio button 

Give short text: Red. Pref. Share Capital 

Give G/L Account Long Text: Redeemable Pref. Share capital 


Select only balances in local currency check box 

Select line items display check box 

Sort key: 001 


Field status group: G001 

Save 

Keep the cursor on FS00 

Select default all button 

Save 


Give the recording: AMLGL 

Enter & Save 


Execute 


Select create a structure button 

Source structure: AMLGL Structure 

248

Description: GL Structure for AML 

Enter 

Save 


Execute 


Keep the cursor on AML G/L Structure 

Select table maintenance button 

Copy the field names from excel to SAP 

Copy Code: from excel to SAP 

Copy the length from Excel to SAP: save 

Select back arrow and save once again 


Execute 


Save 


Execute 


From the menu select entries � Auto fields mapping 

Fuzzy probability percent: Give 100 

Enter 

Go on press accept proposal button till you get the message 

249

Auto field mapping complete 

Enter & save 


Skip maintain fixed values, transactions, user define routines 

Select specify files radio button 

Execute 


Keep the cursor on legacy data 

Select Add entry button 

Give the file name: AML Text 

Name: GL uploading 

Select tabulator radio button 

Enter & Save 


Execute 


Save 


Execute 



Skip display imported data 

250

Select convert data radio button 

Execute 



Skip display converted data 

Select create a batch input session 

Execute 


Ignore the message – Enter 

Execute 

Select the session name: AML 

Select Process button 

Select display/errors only radio button 


Select exit batch input button 

Use the transaction code: FS00 

Cash Journal (Petty Cash Book) 

251

Creation G/L Master – FS00 




Give the G/L Account No: 200100 (Cash A/C) 


Enter 

Change the short text & long text to petty cash 



Select post automatically only check box 

Save (or) ctrl +s 

Define No. range intervals for cash journal document 

SPRO � Financial Accounting � Bank Accounting � Business transactions � Cash 

Journal � Define no. range interval for cash journal documents 




Give the No. range – 01 

From No: 1 to 100000 

Enter & save 

Set up cash Journal 

Same Path: 

252



Cash journal No: 001 

Give the G/L Account No: 200102 (Petty cash A/C) 

Currency: INR 

Document type for G/L Account: SA 

Document type for vendor payment: KZ 

Document type from vendor receipt: KZ 

Document type for customer payment – DZ 

Cash journal name, petty cash – city office 


Create, change, and delete Business Transactions: 

Same Path 



Business transactions type: Select R (Revenue) 


Cash Journal Business transactions – Revenues 

Select Account Modifiable check box 


Business transactions: E (Expenses) 

Account No: 400100 (Salaries) 

Cash Journal, Business transaction expenses 

Select: Account modifiable check box 

253


Set up parameters for Cash Journal: 

Same Path 



Program: RFCASHOO 

Variant: DEMOEN 

Correspondence: SAP18 


Cash Sales Posting: 

Path: Accounting � Financial Accounting � Journal Ledger � documents entry � 

cash Journal Posing (FBCJ) 

From the menu select: extras � Change cash journal 


Cash Journal: 001 

Enter 

Give the display period: 15.10.2006 

Select cash receipts tab 

Select business transactions: 1 (revenues) 

Amount: 20000 

G/L Account: 300000 

Text: sales posting 

Give the business area: AMH 

Select post button 

254

Select print: cash journal button 

Ignore the message, enter 

Account payable 

Configure the Data Medium Exchange for making payments 

How can I configure the Data Medium Exchange for making payments? 

How can I link it to (F110) payment program & get the file MT100 to be sent to the 

bank? 

When configuring the payment methods for the country (transaction OBVCU), choose 

the payment medium program as RFFOM100. 

From se38, pls read the documentation for the program, which will give you the various 

options & the required config too. 

You would also need to configure the instructions keys as required. 

To generate the DME file, you have to run the automatic payment program with this 

payment method. 

After the payments have been successfully posted, you can go to DME administration 

and with the help of dme manager download files on your PC. 

SAP has determined that the standard print programs for automatic payments will no 

longer be supported, and will be replaced by transfer structures created by a tool called 

the DME Engine. 

This tool enables the business to create DME output files without ABAP development, 

and can be attached to a print program and form for the creation of Payment Advices. 

Outside of the DME Engine (DMEE), the majority of the configuration takes place within 

the following IMG menu path: 

IMG Path: Financial Accounting --> Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable --> 

Business Transactions --> Outgoing Payments --> Automatic Outgoing Payments --> 

Payment Media --> Make Settings for Payment Media Formats from Payment Medium 

Workbench 

Config 

Assign Selection Variants 

IMG --> Financial Accounting --> Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable --> 

Business Transactions --> Outgoing Payments --> Automatic Outgoing Payments --> 

Payment Media --> Make Settings for Payment Medium Formats from Payment Medium 

Workbench --> Create / Assign Selection Variants or transaction 

255

OBPM4.select your format that you are using 

Check in FBZP config that all is linked! 

Although this is bitty but you need to work through it! 

Start with FBZP, create all there than go to DMEE either to create your own format or 

use the standard ones.. than go to the menu path above and work through from create to 

assign... 

Set the baseline date=Invoice date 

Through payment terms, you can set the baseline date=Invoice date. 

The payment term is entered in the Vendor Master Record and it will be defaulted in 

MIRO. 

If payment term in Purchase Order is different from the Vendor Master Data, it will have 

preference over the Vendor Master Data. 

FB50, FB60, No document number was display 

On the first day of business after the basis people apply an upgrade to a kernel, over the 

weekend, we lost visibility to the document numbers in the status bar after we posted 

transactions FB50 and FB60. 

An OSS message was created and the reply was that it was an issue with a kernel patch 

level. 

They refer us to OSS note 510815, and kernel patch level 1121. 

MIRO No FI document after upgrading to 4.6x 

When we upgrade to 4.6x, users was not willing to access the FI document through 

Invoice display :- 

MIR4 --> Follow on documents 

I agreed with them because it is really troublesome to go through such a long steps in 

order to find out the FI document number. 

In 4.6x, SAP only display the Invoice document number after posting. 

256

In order to display both the Invoice and FI document number at the same time, you have 

to apply OSS notes 216935 and 310231. 

You need to changed the programs in order to get the message 

"Invoice Document no. & and FI Document no. & created." 

The following messages which were modified as per the OSS note to get the FI 

document number. 

Message no 

New text Old text 

060 Document no. & created. Invoice Document no. & and FI Document no. & created 

075 Document no. & Created (blocked for payment) Invoice Document no. & and FI 

Document no. & created (blocked for payment) 

282 Document reversed with no. &: Please manually clear FI documents (No change 

done in the message text). But it will display FI document number after changes. 

392 Invoice document & has been posted (Now this displays Invoice document number. 

After changes, it will display FI document number). 

After these changes you will be able to see the FI document number and Invoice 

document number displayed in the message bar after executing the MIRO Transaction. 

You will need authorizations and access key to do the modification. 

To avoid transfer posting of the same vendor invoice 

You can check "Flag for double invoices or credit memos" on Vendor master data. 

In FK02, Company code data --> Options Payment transactions. 

Tick Check double invoice. 

Different between posting and payment 

Posting occurs with many different types of documents. It indicates that all sides of the 

FI entry are in balance. Posting actually writes the document to the G/L. 

Payment on the other hand is the actual issuing of a check. Payments can also be 

processed in accounts receivable. 

In that case, you are posting (updating your books to reflect) the receipt of a check from a 

customer and the deposit of said check in the bank. 

257

Accounts payable is processing the money your company owes to a vendor for goods and 

services received. Account Payable is a liability on the balance sheet. 

Accounts receivable is collecting the money that other companies/customers owe you. It 

is an asset on the balance sheet. 

SAP is integrated. In most instances, there isn't a "link." The transaction directly updates 

the tables involved. There is a semi-severance between FI/Payment to allow checks to be 

issued even if there's a minor imbalance in the FI side of the posting. 

Asset depreciation and physical inventory are some examples that don‟t update FI 

(CO/FM) as soon as the document is saved. 

Modules that appear in more than one place is caused by SAP trying to be flexible in 

where it places things on its menu, so that different users/companies find it easy to locate 

a given transaction within the confines of the module they work in. This has become 

more pronounced since the change to role based authorization management. That's why 

you can reach create a 

requisition from 4 different pathways, why Project Systems is in both Logistics and FI, 

and why Travel Management is in both HR and FI. 

In some organizations, travel authorization and tracking is an HR function, in some it is 

an FI function. 

Vendors not used within a specified period 

Subject: vendors not used within a specified period 

A while back I found a report which listed vendors not used within a specified period i.e. 

list all vendors with no movement over the past 6 months. I can't seem to locate this 

report/programmed? 

Subject: RE: vendors not used within a specified period 

Try report S_ALR_87010043 - Vendor Business. Within the report, under the 

Output Control section, select the indicator "Accounts with No Purchases” and run the 

report for the time period which you wish to evaluate. 

this helps 

Setting Up Automatic Payment Program 

258

I am doing a project in my institute. We are facing a problem in running a 

automatic payment program. Suppose I have a balance of Rs 100000 in my bank 

account and today I am running an Automatic payment run. Total payments of the 

run are Rs 150000. So when I run Automatic payment run it is not giving any error 

message. What to do with this problem. 

In my point of view we have to create validation. And link between bank account 

and payment method. If the balance is less than the automatic payment amount the 

run should be stopped. 

The Automatic Payment Program does not check the Balance of your Bank Account. (GL 

A/c. Bal.) 

What it does check is the min & max amounts that you have maintained in your 

customization. 

In FBZP Transaction (type in easy access screen), you have to maintain the config for 

your automatic payment runs. 

In Bank determination (in FBZP), you have to fill in the available amounts for each 

Bank. This is the maximum amount up to which payments will be generated by the Auto. 

Pay. Run. 

So if you want to ensure that on any single day the payment run does not pay more than 

bank balance, you have to update on a daily basis available balance to match with your 

bank balance. 

In SPRO you can find the customization for A P Run, but FBZP is the old transaction for 

the same thing. Plus it lets you do all the related customization, in one place. 

As far as I know, there is no direct way of linking your GL account balance to the A P 

Run 

Delink Cheque Payment from Payment Document 

I want to delink cheque number 000100 from payment doc 4500021. 

I want to reverse the payment doc 4500021 and pass a new payment doc 4500022 

and attach (Link) the cheque number 000100 to this new payment doc 4500022. 

Note the following functionality: 

Cheque Voiding (same as cheque cancellation as we call it) 

FCH3 - For unused Cheques i.e. cheques that are not yet assigned to Payment docs. 

259

FCH9 - For issued cheques i.e. cheques assigned to payment docs. 

The above will only void the cheque and the payment doc will stand as it is. After 

voiding the cheque the related payment doc can be reassigned to a new cheque. 

If you reverse a Payment document itself (T.Code FB08) then the system will ask for a 

void reason if a cheque is already assigned. The voiding of cheque will be done 

automatically if you reverse the payment doc and enter a void reason code. You cannot 

reverse a payment doc that has been assigned a cheuqes unless you enter a void reason 

code. 

There is no other transaction available for Payment Cancellation - FCH8 

The cheque that has been voided is blocked for further use. If you still want to use it you 

need to first delete the cheque information. T.Code FCHE. 

Also cheque related t.codes in this aspect. Related T.codes start with FCH* and can be 

found in the Area Menu Cheque Information. 

FI Questions about GR/IR 

1. How do we post the FI transactions after doing MIGO. Does the Migo generate 

FI postings or do we manually do the posting. If we do it manually what is the 

T.Code to do it. 

2. How do we post the FI transactions after doing MIRO? 

Does the Miro generate FI postings or do we manually do the posting. 

If we do it manually what is the T.Code to do it. 

3. How do we reverse an Invoice? We go to miro and enter a credit memo. How 

do we post the reversal entry. 

In SAP, the moment you save the MIGO transaction, it automatically generates FI 

document. It will create following entry:- 

Raw Material Stock A/c Dr 

To GR/IR Clearing A/c 

In MIGO transaction itself, you can post Excise by choosing Capture and Post Excise 

Invoice. The FI document will be as follows: 

RG23A Basic Excise Duty A/c Dr 

RG23A Education Cess A/c Dr 

To CENVAT Clearing A/c 

260

After doing MIGO, you execute MIRO. In this transaction also, SAP will generate FI 

document automatically. The entry will be as follows:- 

GR/IR Clearing A/c Dr 

CENVAT Clearing A/c Dr 

VAT Setoff A/c Dr 

To AP-Vendor A/c 

Reversion of entry of material purchase can be in entered on rejection of material 

partially or wholly. In this case, you will 

have to raise a debit note on the vendor. But before raising debit note, you have to first 

ensure that the Invoice verification of the material (to be rejected) is complete at the time 

of purchase. 

Purchase documents cannot be reversed directly like pure financial document entry. To 

reverse the material document, 

following procedure should be followed. 

1) Create Return Delivery (MIGO) 

2) Reverse the Excise Duty Posted (J1IS) 

3) Raise the debit Note. (MIRO) 

Update Trading Partner Field for Posted Documents 

In FBL5N/FBL1N, I have checked the related documents and found that one of the 

line items is having 'Trading Partner' field as BLANK. So I need to enter the 

Trading Partner in the document header. Here I have noticed that the Trading 

partner field is DISABLED and hence I am unable to enter the values and proceed 

further. 

I think if I can fill the trading partner field with the required value the documents 

can be cleared. 

How can I make the Trading Partner field active. In the document type setting KA 

(used here) the 'Enter Trading Partner' flag is ON. Also I have checked the Field 

Status settings for the Posting Key also for Trading Partner. 

Solution: 

On the first hand it is not possible to update the trading partner field f or posted 

documents, as per SAP Standard. There are two alternatives to this: 

Alternative 1: 

REVERSE AND DOCUMENTS CAUSING THE PROBLEM AND RECREATE 

THEM AFREASH 

261

1. Find out if there are any clearing documents within the main document in question 

which is not getting cleared due the trading partner field. 

2. Goto FBRA: Reset and reverse the clearing documents if any as found in step 1. 

3. Goto F-02 give the main document number; then goto "Document>Reverse" menu or 

press CTRL+SHIFT+F12 to reverse the document. 

4. Goto F-02: Recreate the main document using "Post with reference" function of 

document header which gets automatically populated (with correct Trading Partner field 

)as per setting defined in the customer/vendor master data once the document is saved. 

5. Goto F-44/F-32 and then try clearing the vendor/customer. 

6. Don‟t forget the post the clearing documents which were reversed in Step 2. 

Alternative 2: This shall be taken as the worst case which shall not be recommended as 

normal practice. 

To develop an ABAP which shall update the trading partner field VBUND in Table 

BSEG, BSIK, BSID and then try clearing the documents. 

What is Trading Partners? 

In Business Terms Trading partner is your business partner within Group with whom you 

are doing business. In order to identify Inter Company transactions trading partner field is 

used. You need to define all the Group Companies as company in SAP and all the 

defined Companies will be available for selection in trading partner field. Trading 

partner can be defaulted in GL, Customer or Vendor Master. If you need you can 

populate trading partner at Document level too by doing settings in Document Type 

Master in T Code OBA7. 

Trading partner is normally used to control (payment/transaction) vendor/customer 

business with the group. Something like group/inter group business. You have to go to 

master record. For eg, in customer master, go to CONTROL DATA tab so see Account 

Control, in which you have provide trading partner number/reference. 

. 

Controlling 

Simple Overview of Product Costing 

SAP Product Costing deals with Plan Costing + Actual Costing of Finish products or 

Services. 

CO comprises Product Costing + cost accounting integrated with FI. 

It uses Integrated Cost Accounting. 

262

Product costing also has 2 phases depending on the Mfg Scenarios. If you are a normal 

mfg comp, making goods to stock & sale, you have to first do planning of the costs of 

products initially as a STD COST of a product. This is used in many phases in SAP CO 

accounting. In simple terms, you cost a product by different methods depending on 

different LIFE CYCLE phases of product. These are Development of new product. 

Growth stage by modifying it. Mature stage (mass prod). Decline Retirement of that 

product from Mfg+Mktng) 

The whole CO process starts with these PLANNED costs of products & ends with 

totaling the STD Costs for Actual Production. 

This is a simple Std cost Accounting system, in which the end result is calculating 

Variance bet Planned & Actual & analyzing those for further corrective actions. 

Product costing is well integrated to FI, but only where overhead cost accounting is used. 

Otherwise normally it used only for settlement. All these actual costs of Prod are finally 

settled/offset to FI or Profitability segments. 

SAP CO is a very vast & complicated module of all. It needs deep understanding of the 

subject. This gives you an overview glimpse of SAP CO. 

Difference between Cost Centers and Internal Orders 

Would any one please tell me that 

1. What is the basic difference between Cost Centers and Internal orders? 

2. I understand that their functionality is same like assessments, distribution etc. 

then why there are divided into Cost Centers and Internal orders? 

3. How the data flows from Cost Centers and Internal Orders? i.e. is it first into 

Internal orders then to Cost Centers or Vice versa? or else the data is maintained 

independently? 

4. Does settlement means running the Assessment cycle and distributing the costs to 

various cost centers from an internal order? 

5. How you determine the cost of an Order or cost for an order? I.e. how a Cost in 

Order is determined? 

A cost center as you will know is for fixed reporting for a long time span as part of your 

company structure (cost center usually = department or work center). 

An internal order is used to accumulate cost for a specific project or task for a specific 

time period. An internal order is therefore used for a short period with a specific 

deadline. 

Your internal order will usually settle to cost centers (and not visa versa) according to the 

settlement rule in the order setup. 

263

An internal order can therefore be used to group all the expenses incurred to plan and 

hold a conference over a 3 month period. The order can be settled on a monthly basis to 

cost centers. 

When the conference is finished the order can be settled finally. The cost of the 

conference will then be spread over 2 or more cost centers, but can be viewed in total on 

the internal order when needed. 

It is important to understand the difference between a settlement and an assessment cycle. 

An assessment cycle distributes costs from one cost center to various other cost centers. 

You cannot assess from a cost center to an internal order or visa versa. Assessment cycles 

are only between cost centers. 

Settlements are used for orders. In the setup of each order is a "settlement rule". In this 

settlement rule you tell the system to which cost centers the cost in the order must be 

settled. 

Typically, you will execute the following procedure at month-ends: 

1. Settle all orders - this will settle all costs on orders to cost centers. 

2. Run assessment cycles - Now that you have al costs against cost centers from your 

orders, you can start distributing costs between cost centers with assessments. 

Costs are posted to an order. When you process a purchase order you post to the internal 

order and not to a cost center. The same applies to journals in FI. You will post the costs 

to the order and not to a cost center. You will then settle the order on month-ends to post 

to the relevant cost centers. It is very important to settle these orders otherwise FI and CO 

will not 

balance on your system. 

Internal orders can also be used as "statistical" orders. This is also specified in the setup 

of the order. You do not have to settle statistical orders. When posting costs, you will 

post to the cost center and the order simultaneously. Both have to be specified when 

posting journals or purchase orders against statistical orders. 

Populating Transaction Type during Order Settlement 

You have an internal order that you want to settle to a balance sheet account. This 

accounts field status makes the transaction type (BSEG-BEWAR) required. During 

settlement you receive error message F5 808 stating that this field is status initial but 

the field is required. This field is not available to you in the settlement rule 

definition. Is it possible that this field is suppressed? You could not locate a means 

to display or require it if so. You attempted to resolve this using a substitution that 

would popluate the transaction type field. However, during execution you did not 

hit the breakpoint you put into the user exit. How to overcome this issue? 

264

You can change the requirement of the field in the "Field Status" of the account 

(Financial Accounting --> General Ledger Accounting --> Business Transaction --> G/L 

Account Posting --> Carry Out and Check Documents Settings --> Maintain Field Status 

Variants) 

or 

In transaction OB41 where you define posting keys and its "Field status". Both "Field 

Status" are maybe different, but if in one of them the field is like "required entry" you 

have to change it. But if you are posting a fixed asset account, you will need this field 

completed because it defines the movement you are making. 

What is Production Order Settlement? 

Settlement is nothing but offsetting the costs to the FI portion. CO objects carry costs, 

which needs to be re-assigned to the G/L accounts where it comes from. 

CO never generates any data; it only tracks the same onto some objects which are 

analyzed for definite purpose of tracking the resources which are debits in FI as costs in 

G/L). 

In simple words, the flow is like following - 

1. Direct Costs are incurred (like material consumption) in form of issues to prod orders. 

These are captured in G/L. Whenever you issue, consumption account is debited. But are 

also debited to prod order as 

Consumption...Dr 

Inventory.......Cr 

2. Indirect costs are incurred in form of debits to Cost centers in G/Ls. These are actually 

to be allocated & absorbed in Products via Prod Orders. So it is allocated to prod orders 

via diff media like costing sheet or Indirect activity allocations. 

Here again Prod order is debited with some amount. 

When the costs are incurred these should be transferred further when the order is closed 

or delivered to stock. So whenever you deliver the order, the following entry is 

generated- 

Inventory....Dr 

Cost of Prod /Mfg Variance.....Cr 

If your Fin Goods' predetermined cost are same as that of actual costs incurred, there will 

no price difference account affected. But when your plan cost (target cost) & actual costs 

are different, the difference is OFFSET or SETTELLED to price diff accounts as- 

265

Cost of Prod / Mfg Var....Dr 

Price diff acc..........Cr 

Note that Price diff account is not created as COST ELEMENT. 

If actual cost is less than target cost, entry would be reverse. 

How does one Deactivate a Cost Center 

How does one deactivate a Cost Center? 

I can find a t.code to activate an Inactive one but how do I deactivate a CC. Or is it 

so simple I cannot see it... 

Go to KS02- Change Cost Center. Go to the Control Tab. Tick on the checkbox for 

desired transaction activity you want to lock. Any postings made against the cost center 

under locked activity/ies will not be allowed 

Thank you, I knew I could block the postings but I want to somehow make the Cost 

Center Look Inactive. 

To explain: 

In transaction OKEON (Change Standard Hierarchy) I have Green Dots for Active CC's. 

The legend (attached) says a Red Dot is for Inactive CC's. 

How do you do that? 

Hi Marios, if you want to change the status to inactive, the only option as far as my 

knowledge is concerned is to change the validity period. When you double click the cost 

centre, details of cost centre will be displayed at the bottom by T code OKEON and you 

will find the status of cost centre there, just right of that you will find button to change 

the validity period, change the period to some future date then it turns to inactive status. 

I had changed the Validity Period before but I set it to start right where the previous time 

horizon ended so looking in the future this was always active. 

Requires an Assignment to a CO Object 

266

The first time Account 820290 was only created in FI as a primary expense. After 

that this account was created in CO too as a secondary expense and any posting will 

appear an error: Account 820290 requires an assignment to a CO object 

Question: How to correct this account back to FI only and not to appear in co? 

Note: 

Account 820290 requires an assignment to a CO object Message no. KI 235 

Diagnosis You have not defined a CO account assignment for an account that is 

relevant to cost accounting. System Response Account 820290 is defined as a cost 

element. This means that you must always specify a CO account assignment. 

Procedure 

Enter one of the following CO account assignments 

Order Cost center / cost center/ activity type 

Sales order item (for a project or cost relevant) 

Project / WBS element 

Cost object (Process manufacturing) 

Network/ Network activities 

Business process 

Profitability segment 

Real estate object 

The posting row affected is 000, account 820290. 

First, if G/L account was created in FI, you can only create primary cost element in CO. 

Secondary cost element can only be created if no account exists in FI. 

Second, if you created the primary or secondary cost element in CO, you have to assign 

CO account assignment. 

You can delete cost element in CO (KO04) if dependent objects found. 

Third, when you create cost element in CO, documents would be also created in „Cost 

center accounting‟ and „Profit center accounting‟ when posing in FI. If no cost element 

exists in CO, no related documents would be created in CCA and PCA. 

Difference Between Primary and Secondary Cost Element 

267

Explain the difference between primary and secondary cost element? With an 

example. 

Primary cost elements are like material costs, personnel costs, energy costs... where a 

corresponding GL account exists in FI to allow costs to flow... 

Secondary cost elements are like production costs, material overheads, production 

overheads; they can be created and administered in only CO. These are used in internal 

cost allocation, overhead calculation, settlement transactions; it does not flow to FI... 

General - Cost Element 

Basically, cost element are carriers of costs. 

Primary Cost Element 

When cost element carriers cost between FI and CO they are called Primary, the link is 

established GL A/c = Cost element(Primary). A question may arise as to whether all GL 

accounts are cost element, it again depends upon the business requirement, where COPA 

is active then revenue account (GL) are also cost elements, where COPA is not active 

then revenue account (GL) should not be made as an cost element. 

Example.... 

Again cost of goods sold particularly in VAX (make to stock) is not an cost element, 

where the same COGS in VAY (make to order) is a cost element. Price Difference 

account should not be made as cost element. 

Entry while booking expenses 

Travel Expenses A/c - with Cost Centre Dr. Rs.YY 

(will be a GL A/c and cost element) - entries flows to CO thru FI 

To Cash A/c Cr. Rs.YY 

Secondary Cost Element 

When cost element carries cost with in CO, then they are called secondary cost element. 

Example.... - Take Product Costing 

on manufacture of the goods the cost of the above product (production order) is arrived at 

accumulating material cost + operational cost + overheads (%), additive cost if any. 

268

The cost of operation is accumulated in cost centre be it production / production service / 

service cost centers, while booking FI entries. 

Those operational costs have to be allocated to production order based on operational 

activities carried on and its cost involved in it. Those operation activities in CO are 

termed as activity types and have to link the same in KP26 with rates and cost centre (i.e. 

sender cost centre and receiver production order). 

In order to find the production order cost, the allocation of cost from sender cost centre to 

production order for the operational activities carried on and its cost associated with it, 

have to be loaded, hence in CO the cost centre allocate that portion of operational cost to 

production order, and this cost is carried by a cost element (since there are no FI 

involvement and entries are flowing within CO by crediting sender cost centre and 

debiting receiver production order a cost element has to be created.... say "Operational 

Cost - Activity" the entry will be 

Operational Cost - Activity (Production Order) Dr Rs.XX 

To Operational Cost - Activity (Cost Centre) Cr Rs.XX 

the entries are with in CO. And the cost element created is secondary since it does not 

have a link with GL Account in FI correspondingly. 

In CO the production order and cost centre are co object including but not limited to. 

Requires an Assignment to a CO Object 

The first time Account 820290 was only created in FI as a primary expense. After 

that this account was created in CO too as a secondary expense and any posting will 

appear an error: Account 820290 requires an assignment to a CO object 

Question : How to correct this account back to FI only and not to appear in co? 

Note : 

Account 820290 requires an assignment to a CO object 

Message no. KI 235 

Diagnosis 

You have not defined a CO account assignment for an account that is relevant to 

cost accounting. 

System Response 

Account 820290 is defined as a cost element. 

This means that you must always specify a CO account assignment. 

Procedure 

Enter one of the following CO account assignments 

269

Order 

Cost center / cost center/ activity type 

Sales order item (for a project or cost relevant) 

Project / WBS element 

Cost object (Process manufacturing) 

Network/ Network activities 

Business process 

Profitability segment 

Real estate object 

The posting row affected is 000, account 820290. 

First, if G/L account was created in FI, you can only create primary cost element in CO. 

Secondary cost element can only be created if no account exists in FI. 

Second, if you created the primary or secondary cost element in CO, you have to assign 

CO account assignment. 

You can delete cost element in CO (KO04) if dependent objects found. 

Third, when you create cost element in CO, documents would be also created in „Cost 

center accounting‟ and „Profit center accounting‟ when posing in FI. If no cost element 

exists in CO, no related documents would be created in CCA and PCA. 

Data Entry 

Entering Invoice Receipts for PO 

The Invoice Verification component is part of the Materials Management (MM) system. 

It provides the link between the MM component and the Financial Accounting, 

Controlling, and Asset Accounting components. 

Invoice Verification in Materials Management serves the following purposes: 

- It completes the materials procurement process - which starts with the purchase 

requisition, continues with purchasing and 

goods receipt and ends with the invoice receipt 

- It allows invoices that do not originate in materials procurement (for example, services, 

expenses, course costs, etc.) to be 

processed 

- It allows credit memos to be processed, either as invoice cancellations or discounts 

Invoice Verification does not handle the payment or the analysis of invoices. The 

information required for these processes is passed on to other departments. 

270

Invoice Verification tasks include: 

- Entering invoices and credit memos that have been received 

- Checking the accuracy of invoices with respect to contents, prices, and arithmetic 

- Executing the account postings resulting from an invoice 

- Updating certain data in the SAP system, for example, open items and material prices 

- Checking invoices that were blocked because they varied too greatly from the purchase 

order 

An example on how to enter an Invoice Receipts :- 

Transaction code MRHR - MM Invoice Verification and Material Valuation 

First Screen 

Document date: Date of PO Company code : 

Document type: There are two standard document types in the standard system: 

RE - The invoice is posted gross 

RN - The invoice is posted net 

Posting date : Date of open period Currency : 

Purchase Order : PO Number 

Second Screen 

Posting 

Amount : Enter the gross invoice amount Tax code : 

Enter and then click Simulate button 

Click Adjustment on/off button 

Click Edit --> New item --> G/L Account 

a) Enter the G/L Account Number and click whether Debit or Credit 

b) Enter the Amount and Cost Center 

Repeat Step a) and b) if you have additional G/L Account Number 

There must be no Variance and Balance must always be ZERO before you can save the 

entries. 

271

Taxes 

Difference between Withholding Taxes and Extended Taxes 

What is the difference between Withholding Taxes and Extended Withholding 

Taxes? 

Please read this for the same. I have mentioned prominent difference between the two. 

Withholding Tax Classic Withholding Tax (All release) Extended Withholding Tax (from 

release 4) 

Difference between the two 

S.No Individual Function Classic Extended 

1 Withholding Tax on Outgoing payment Yes Yes 

2 TDS on Incoming Yes 

3 TDS at the time of Yes 

4 TDS on partial payment Yes 

5 No. of withholding tax from each document max 1 Several 

6 TDS basis - Net mount Yes Yes 

-Gross amount Yes Yes 

-Tax amount x 

Yes 

7 Rounding Rule Yes 

8 Cash discount consideration Yes 

9 Accumulation 

10 Minimum/Maximum amt and exemption Yes 

11 Certification cumbering Yes 

12 Calculation Formula Yes Yes 

Withholding tax is calculated and posted to the appropriate withholding tax accounts at 

different stages, depending on the legal requirements in each country. As a rule, 

withholding tax is posted at the same time that the payment is posted, in other words the 

outgoing payment (Accounts Payable) or incoming payment (Accounts Receivable), is 

reduced by the withholding tax amount. 

In certain countries, such as Brazil, the Philippines, and Spain, withholding tax can or 

must be posted when the invoice is posted. This means that the amount receivable or 

272

payable is reduced by the withholding tax amount. 

Extended withholding tax supports both concepts. 

The key concept in extended withholding tax is the distinction between withholding tax 

type and withholding tax code. While withholding tax types represent basic calculation 

rules, specific features of these rules - in particular the percentage rate - 

are represented by the withholding tax code. You can define any number of withholding 

tax codes for a given withholding tax type. 

If a particular transaction requires more than one kind of withholding tax, this is covered 

in the SAP System by defining more than one withholding tax type. 

When entering a line item, you can enter withholding tax data for each of these 

withholding tax types. 

How to Configure Withholding Tax? 

Steps for extended withholding tax: 

1. Check withholding tax countries 

2. Define Ex. Withholding tax types for invoice postings 

3. Define Ex. Withholding tax codes 

4. Formula for Ex. Withholding tax calculation 

5. Assign Ex. Withholding tax types to Company code 

6. Activate Ex. Withholding tax 

8. Create a G/L a/C for Ex. Withholding tax 

9. Define A/C for Ex. Withholding tax (DBWW) 

10. Make changes in Vendor master (XK02) 

11. Maintain Company Code Settings: 

Path: IMG --> Logistic --> General --> Taxes on goods movement --> India --> Maintain 

company code settings 

12. Activate country version for specific fiscal year position 

Path: IMG --> FA --> --> FAGS --> Taxes on sales purchases --> Basic Setting --> India 

--> Activate country specific for fiscal year position 

Change in Tax 

The transaction code to change your tax rate is FTXP. 

It is reference to your tax codes. 

Tax rates are always updated with reference to FROM DATE. 

273

You need not specified the To Date as the current From date becomes the To Date for the 

earlier rate. 

What is Central Value-added Tax and how it is configured? 

What is CENVAT (Central Value-added Tax) and how it is configured? 

Anil 

Before I am going to explain what cenvat is, you have to under stand the Indian tax 

Central Excise Duty (BED). It is called as basic excise duty. Every manufacturer is 

liable to pay the excise duty in various kinds namely Basic Excise Duty, Special Excise 

Duty, Additional Excise Duty etc., 

Just think over a product which is reached to a end user, how many manufacturing 

activities are done. So to reduce the tax burden of the end user, the Govt. of India 

introduce the MODVAT scheme which is now called CENVAT scheme. 

Based on this, if any manufacturer purchased a material, which is duty paid, and if it is 

used for his further manufacturing activity, he can avail this as credit in his book based 

on the Central Excise Invoice. At the time of selling his manufactured goods, he is liable 

to pay the excise duty. He can adjust the credit which he has taken into his book and pay 

the rest. For example: 

CENVAT availed at the time purchased various goods Rs.20,000 (Excise duty alone) 

CENVAT payable for his product at the time sales Rs.25,000 

He will pay only Rs.5000 through cash deposit in PLA. 

This customizing is in SAP CIN Module. If you are having the CIN CD, go through. 

Good Explanation. In addition to this. The CENVAT means, Tax on Value Addition on 

the goods manufactured according to Central Excise & Customs Act Definition. Here the 

value addition means the Additional Services/Activities etc. which converts the Input in 

to Output, and the output is newly recognized as per the act as Excisable goods. Like this 

the discussion is goes on for definition. 

In 4.7 SAP version, there is no CIN version separately, it is available with Standard SAP 

it self. 

Profit Accounting 

274

CO-PA Transfer of Incoming Sales Orders 

In IMG, I assigned 

1. Value fields 

2. Quantity fields 

and activated transfer of incoming sales orders for "CO-PA transfer of Incoming Sales 

Orders". In CO-PA information system, I defined and executed a report (record type A, 

actual data). The actual line item showed revenue amount 36,000. But when I drilled 

down to the value fields. The system showed revenue = 0. Do I miss something in 

Configuration? 

P.S As we are not implementing PP/PC, I do not maintain "valuation using product cost 

estimates" in CO-PA configuration. 

Subject: Re: CO-PA Transfer of Incoming Sales Orders 

As the data is appearing in the PA tables but not on yr report. One last thing that you can 

check is the whether the report is looking at current data or a 'summarization level'. If you 

are only looking at the data fm summarization levels, then you will need to refresh the 

data in the summarization levels by running transaction KEDU. Otherwise any new delta 

items will not appear in yr report. 

Check this in Report change / extras / performance (v4.0a) or summarization in V3. 

- 


Is your operating concern costing based or account based? 

I can't think of anything else. 

Just to make sure let‟s go step by step: 

1. there are transactions in the system. 

2. The report is created as follows: 

characteristic = customer 

Key figure = revenue, COGS, order qty 

variables = period from = xx.199x 

period to = xx.199x 

Plan/act.ind. = 0 

version = not 

applicable for actual 

record type = A 

3. Value and quantity fields were assigned in IMG under ACTUAL POSTING ---> SD 

INTERFACE. 

275

If all the above is true and it still doesn't work, you should kick the computer in the b...Izi 


You mean, on your report , it also does not work with record type "A"? On my report, no 

matter with record type "A" or "F", it does not work. For you information, I created a 

new report on IDEA (SAP demo system) with the same settings, it works with record 

type "A" and "F". So it might not cause by the record type. 


The problem lies in the way you created the report. It is obvious that the system works. 

You did pick up the revenue. 

Did you create a basic report or a form report? If the problem persists, send me a detailed 

description of each line and each column and I'll try to find the solution. 

Error Message 

FI Document: List of Update Terminations 

To analyze the FI update error posting, make use of report RFVBER00, FI Document: 

list of update termination. 

Execute the report with transaction code SA38 or SE38. 

Fixed Asset 

Posting to Cost Center and Internal Order 

If you have added the field Internal order in the Asset Master as a statistical order and 

you want your depreciation 

posted not only to the cost center but also to this order. 

In transaction OAYR in the IMG you define how depreciation posts to the depreciation 

posting rules - there is a CO assignment box where you have to tick both cost centers and 

internal orders. 

Process Fixed Asset Depreciation 

Every asset transaction immediately causes a change of the forecasted depreciation. 

However, it does not immediately cause an update of the depreciation and value 

adjustment accounts for the balance sheet and profit and loss statements. The planned 

276

depreciation is posted to the general ledger when you run the periodic depreciation 

posting run. This posting run uses a batch input session to post the planned depreciation 

for each posting level for each individual asset as a lump sum amount. 

The calculation and scheduling of depreciation, interest and revaluation are automatically 

controlled by keys in the system, or you can control them manually using a special 

posting transaction. In both cases, planned depreciation from Asset Accounting must be 

periodically posted to the corresponding asset and expense accounts of the general ledger. 

You carry out this posting using a batch input session. In addition to the various 

depreciation types, interest and revaluation, this batch input session also posts the 

allocation and writing off of special reserves. 

When the system posts depreciation, it creates collective documents. It does not create 

separate documents for each asset. 

Depreciation Posting Run is done via transaction code 'AFAB'. 

The program creates batch input sessions for posting depreciation and interest to the G/L 

accounts in Financial Accounting and/or to Controlling. 

Fields Description:- 

Company code: Your Company Code 

Fiscal Year : Your fiscal year 

Posting period: Your depreciation period 

Reason for posting run (choose one) 

Planned posting run: X (default) 

List assets: (tick if you want to see the detail) 

Test run\: (tick if you run in test mode else untick for production run) 

Main asset number: (you can specify certain asset number if you click repeat run or test 

run) 

Note: 

Click the execute button if this is a test run. 

Click the menu bar --> Program --> Execute in background if this is a production run. 

277

You should get this message: 

Background job was scheduled for program RABUCH00 and print out the output. 

Release and Process the Batch Input Session in transaction code 'SM35'. 

Process Session RABUCH00 

X - Display errors only 

Additional functions 

X - Dynpro standard size 

Click the Process button 

If there is error, the system will pop up the error message. 

Correct the error and recreate the session in transaction 'AFBD'. 

Fields Description:- 

Company code: Enter your company code 

Fiscal year: Enter your fiscal year 

Posting period: Enter your posting period 

List assets: (tick if you want to see the detail) 

Test run: (tick if you run in test mode else untick for production run) 

Note: 

Click the execute button if this is a test run. 

Click the menu bar --> Program --> Execute in background if this is a production run. 

You should get this message: 

Background job was scheduled for program RABUCH00 and print out the output. 

Year-end Closing 

The year-end closing enable the company to produced the final balance sheet and profit 

and loss statement for its annual report, which has to be created to meet the particular 

legal obligations in each country. 

Once the fiscal year is closed, you can no longer post or change values within Asset 

Accounting (for example, by recalculating depreciation). The fiscal year that is closed is 

278

always the year following the last closed fiscal year. You cannot close the current fiscal 

year. 

AJAB - Year-End Closing Asset Accounting 

Company code : Your Company code 

Asset classed asset u. const. : Optional 

For fiscal year: Last closed fiscal year 

Uncheck 'Test run' if this is a production run 

At menu bar, click Program --> Execute in background. 

Reverse Year-end closing 

If you closed a fiscal year too soon, and still need to make corrections, you can reset the 

last closed fiscal year in Customizing for :- 

Asset Accounting (Periodic processing --> Year-end closing --> Reverse). 

Using this function, you can re-open the last closed fiscal year, either for selected 

depreciation areas in a company code, or for all depreciation areas in a company code. 

You do this by changing the field for the last closed fiscal year. 

Be careful if you re-open a fiscal year only for certain depreciation areas, and you need to 

make adjustment postings only in these areas. You cannot use the standard transaction 

types for these postings, since the standard transaction types post to all depreciation 

areas. Instead, you have to define your own transaction types in Customizing for Asset 

Accounting (Transactions), limiting them to the required depreciation areas. 

OAAQ - Reverse year-end closing for depreciation area 

At the desired company code, change the fiscal year in 'Closed fiscal year' column. 

Save entries and create a new request. 

Change Asset fiscal year 

AJRW - Asset fiscal year change 

Company code: Your Company code 

279

New fiscal year: Last closed fiscal year 

Uncheck 'Test run' if this is a production run 

At menu bar, click Program --> Execute in background. 

Post Capitalization (asset haven't been post in closed fiscal year) 

If you realized that there are some fixed assets that haven't been post in a closed fiscal 

year, 

Do the following steps:- 

1. Reverse fiscal year closed by following the 'Reverse Year-end Closing' procedure. 

2. Open the accounting fiscal year via transaction 'OB52'. 

3. Post the fixed asset acquisitions in the re-open fiscal year. 

4. Repeat depreciation run for the last period of that closed fiscal year. 

5. Repeat depreciation run for the last period depreciation run of the current fiscal year. 

6. Closed fiscal year by following the 'Year-end closing' procedure. 

7. Closed the accounting fiscal year via transaction 'OB52'. 

Mass change for assets 

Subject: Mass change for assets 

I am experiencing problems in OA02, Asset Mass Change. I am using 4.6C. 

What happened was that I created the Substitution, and then created the 

Step, and I then SAVED. I am not sure if I need to create a RULE or not. I 

have already defined in a STEP, (using Formula Builder) that most assets 

belonging to a certain asset class, 9011 with a current Cost centre, 

Z01, are to be assigned to another Cost Centre Z02, within the same Co. 

Code. I then saved the Substitution, although I noticed that there was a "?" 

Icon next to the RULES folder. I am well aware that for Time Dependent 

Data, we would need to specify a "Valid From" date. (ADATU, in Table ANLZ) But, 

do we need to specify a "Valid To" date as well? 

My data is like this..... 

280

PREREQUISITES: Asset Class =3D '9011' 

SUBSTITUTION: Valid From is substituted by Constant '19.08.2001' 

Cost Centre is substituted by Constant 'ZB02' 

If I need to create a Rule, What would I need to enter? 

I then created a Work List, and assigned the Substitution to it. After 

this, I generated the Work list in Background using AR31. 

Everything seems ok, but when I check the Assets, I still see the old 

Cost Centre, NOT the New Cost Centre. 

Subject: RE: Mass change for assets 

Rules are not required. 

You get a? Because you probably started to create one and did not 

finish. 

For a Cost centre mass change, if you want to have it time dependent, 

you must specify 'valid from' and 'valid to' in the substitution rule. 

In config you determine if you want to use the time dependency or not 

(default is: Yes 

Asset master data upload 

Any one could help me, pls? I am new to Asset accounting while I have a potential 

job for mass upload of master data using transaction AS02. Focus is to convert the 

asset super number from an old reference to a new reference (to be determined by 

client), plus some other field modifications included in the request. 

I would be using BAPI_FIXEDASSET_CHANGE for instance. What table/s I shall 

look into to explore the system requirements for this? 

To make a mass change, you have two options: 

1. If the change of the field can be put into an algorithm (e.g., enter XYZ as a super 

number for all assets in class 1234), you can use a mass change rule. You first define the 

mass change rule in the same way as you would define an asset substitution (IF 

281

something, THEN something else), then you go into the mass change transaction, select 

the right assets, the proper change rule ... and hit Execute. 

2. Very often, it is easier to prepare the data in Excel and use transaction AS02 for the 

upload. Here, I can recommend transaction LSMW - you simulate (and record) the AS02 

transaction on one fixed asset master, then follow all the steps proposed by the system 

(define fixed values, variables, etc.) and finally upload the Excel (.csv). System will 

automatically generate a batch input for all assets. It may take some time for you if you 

do it for the first time, but it is the best way if you would otherwise need to define 

complex algorithms. 

So - use option 1 if you have a simple algorithm for many assets, and option 2 if "each 

case is different" or if you feel more comfortable in Excel than ABAP. Option 2 is 

simple, but of course takes some time to generate the upload and then run the batch 

sessions (while option 1 changes everything instantly in a matter of seconds). 

I’ve read you post re mass changes of the fixed assets and also interesting in the 

transaction code for the mass changes. 

Also I did not understand for LSMW how to simulate (record) AS02 transaction, 

could you pls describe clearer how to do it? Or better send the CSV file as an 

example… 

Here are the details: 

I. To use mass change: 

1. First, define a mass change rule in transaction OA02 (Accounting - Financial 

accounting - Fixed assets - Environment - Mass change rule). For each company code, 

you can define one rule (or a sequence of them). However, all of them will always be 

executed at the same time. Therefore, if you need to define different rules for different 

assets, you will have to do this repeatedly. Technically, this is done in the same way as 

AA substititution. 

2. Once the rule is defined, you need to select assets for mass change. Go to transaction 

AR01 (Accounting - Financial accounting - Fixed assets - Environment - Work list - 

Generate). Enter selection criteria like on any standard AA report, and run Execute. I 

cannot simulate this now on my system (we do not have AA), but it should ask what you 

want to do (mass change, mass retirement, etc.) and ask for a name of the work list (write 

anything - e.g., Super number change). The system will show you a list of selected assets 

in a report format. Check it and make sure that it is correct. You may add or remove 

single assets from this (now cannot tell you how, but it is possible). If you are happy with 

the list, save it. 

282

3. The last step is execution of the change. Go to transaction AR31 (same path as above), 

execute the report and if you are happy with the list (same as in step 2), press Save. 

System will show you a log of change (what went through, which errors occurred). You 

are done. 

II. LSMW 

LSMW is a transaction, which will let you mass upload almost any other transaction 

(FB01, FD01, AS91, etc.). You do it in the following way: 

1. Enter into transaction LSMW (no menu path), possibly in a development / test system 

2. First, define a project, subproject and object (relatively formal task). 

3. On the horizontal menu, go to Goto --> Recordings. Click on "Create recording". 

4. Enter the name and description of recording (freely definable). 

5. I cannot simulate this now in my system, but SAP will ask you about transaction code 

(AS02) and will take you into the AS02 transaction. In this step, do the change manually. 

Make sure you "touch" (change / write something) in all fields which you want to 

update. 

6. Once you are done, save the recording and return on the start page of LSMW. Click 

"Execute". 

7. You will see a list of tasks. Do them one by one. They should be relatively simple (and 

I cannot help you with them). Important is step 3 (maintain source fields) - here you 

define the columns of your excel (CSV) file in the particular order. In step 5 (field 

mapping and conversion rule), you assign file columns to SAP fields (note that you will 

see only those fields which you "touched" during recording). You need to go through all 

the steps. In the end, you get (and run) a batch session. 

8. If you did this in a development system, transport the LSMW object (menu Extras - 

Export project, Extras - Import project). You have to do it via file, not via standard 

transports of configuration (it is perhaps more simple). 

I cannot simulate it now (no AA module around), so I hope it will work. Let me know if 

it does not. Make sure you test it first in development or quality system! And let us know 

your feedback! 

1. There is "company" field in the Company Code global settings. The R/3 

help says that it is being used for consolidation. We can use Group Chart of 

account to do the same. What is the significance of this field? 

A). Company is an organizational unit which is generally used in the legal 

consolidation to roll up financial statements of several company codes. A company 

can include one or more company codes. If we are going for Consolidation, we need 

to enter the 6 character alphanumeric company ident ifier that relates to this 

company code. Company Codes within a Company must use the same chart of 

accounts and fiscal year. And for consolidation purpose we use Group COA wherein 

we link the Operating COA thru entering the GL account no. of the Group COA in the 

GL Account of the Operating COA. 

283

2. When we copy the COA, only one Fin Stat Version is being copied. A COA 

can have many Fin Stat Versions. Why copying of COA allows only one Fin St 

Ver? 

A). A financial statement version corresponds to the chart of accounts and wherein 

Individual (operational) accounts are assigned to the corresponding FS item on the 

lowest level of this version. But as for the rollup of Accounts is not possible in all the 

FSV which can be copied, n rather can update manually n c reate multiple FSVs if 

necessary depending on the Financial Statements which are necessary for the 

Organization. 

3. What are the information that are not copied to new company code when 

we copy company code? 

3A). All the Organizational units (Global Data) for a company code will b copied to 

new company code upon using the copy function except for the transactional data. 

4. Whether one group chart of account can be assigned to 2 Operational 

charts. For Eg. INTA and INTB is being used by group of company as OCA. 

Whether GCA GRP can be assigned to INTA and INTB? 

4A). Yes, Group COA can be assigned i.e., the GL A/c.No. is linked to the GL 

Accounts of the both Operating COA . That means Group COA consists of unique set 

of Accounts which can be linked to Op.COA –1 and Op.COA –2. 

SAP FI/CO Tips by: 

Ans: Q.No.1. In the SAP system, consolidation functions in financial accounting are 

based on companies. A company can comprise one or more company codes. For 

example: Company A have 4 company codes which is exist ing in different state and / 

or country. When Company A wants to consolidated the accounts, it will give the 

common list of accounts which in turn called group chart of accounts. Group chart of 

account is used to define/ list the GL account uniformly for all company codes. 

Ans: Q.No.2. In SAP R/3 system, will allow only one financial statement version for 

single COA which you need to assign the same while copying the COA. T.code OBY7 

Ans: Q.No.3. When you want to create FYV, PPV, COA etc for new company code 

which is as same as existing company code, then you can copy all the information 

from the source company code to the target company else whatever is required as 

per the new company code requirement you can only copy the same, rest you can 

create as per the requirement. for example Fiscal year for new company code may 

be shortened fiscal year which is differ from the existing company code. In this case, 

fiscal year for new company code you have to create and assign it to company code. 

Ans: Q.No.4. Operational chart of accounts is something differ from the Group chart 

of accounts but Group chart of account can be assigned to Operating chart of 

account 1 and 2 through GL account no. 

284

Operating chart of accounts: The operating chart of accounts contains the GL 

accounts that you use for posting in your company code during daily activities. 

Financial accounting and controlling both use this chart of accounts. You have to 

assign an operating chart of account to a company code. 

Group chart of accounts: The group chart of accounts contains the GL accounts that 

are used by the entire corporate group. This allows the company to provide reports 

for the entire corporate group. 

How do I know which target cost version we are using? 

To find out which version is used for your Target Cost, try this menu path 

IMG > Controlling --> Product Cost Controlling --> Cost Object Controlling --> 

Product Cost by Order --> Period-end Closing --> Variance Calculation --> Define 

Target Cost Versions (tcode OKV6). 

How do you change the "Input tax code - Assets without input tax" value for 

a company in Asset Accounting? Technically, how do you change field 

MWSKZVA field in table T093C? TIA. 

You can use transaction 'OBCL'. 

Via customizing: Asset accounting --> Integration with general ledger --> Assign 

input tax indicator for non-taxable acquisitions 

Require GR & IV report 

Is there any report on GR pending for IV? 

You could try executing program RFWERE00, without postings. 

This is the same program which is used for period end closing- regrouping of 

GR/IR...but for only a report do not create postings. (Or) 

May be transaction MB5S can help you out. 

Retained Profit Account 

After you run the GL balance carry forward, you only manage to know the 

balance carry forward for the retained profit account but you don't how 

much is actually post to the particular account. You have try almost all of 

the standard report but still can't find any report that can show you the 

figure. 

The balance carried forward is only a 'calculated' figure and not a 'posted' figure. The 

break-up of the retained earnings figure is available when you run the balance 

285

carried forward report. 

You can also derive the balance by selecting only the P&L Accounts for the relevant 

period. The net balance of these accounts should equal the retained earnings 

account. 

ACH payment configuration 

Based on 4.0B. Is it possible to configure the system for ACH payments or 

do we need to upgrade? 

You can use RFFOUS_T to produce an ACH file. You may have to use user exits to 

write header and trailer records. Please read documentation on this program and it is 

self-explanatory. 

Locking of Planning Data in Profit Center Accounting 

How to lock planning data in profit center accounting. 

In 4.6 b the transaction is S_ALR_87004395 - Maintain Versions you can lock 

versions for each fiscal year 

Changes in vendor master 

Is there a report which shows changes in vendor master data? 

Not only for one like MK04 or XK04 but for a range like all changes in 

vendors per code. 

(Should be similar to customer master transaction OV51) 

You can use report "RFKABL00". 

In the accounts payable reporting menu this program can be found via: 

Accounts payable --> Adequacy and documentation --> Master data --> Display of 

vendor changes 

(Depending on your SAP version of course) 

Bank Statement Upload 

How to use the program RFEBKATX? This creates two files STATE.TXT and 

ITEM.TXT. 

How are these files imported into SAP? 

286

Try using program RFEBKA00 to upload the two files. 

- one is the header file containing the House bank & account information along with 

the date and the statement number 

- the other is the item details 

Question & Answers for SAP FI/CO Certification Sample Questions 

Which of the following statements are correct? 

Answer: 

A More than one chart of accounts can be created for each client 

B The chart of accounts contains all the G/L accounts, vendor accounts and 

customer accounts 

C More than one company code can be allocated to the same chart of accounts 

D The chart of accounts controls all the customizing settings in the R/3 system 

E All accounts within a chart of accounts must have the same tax code 

Question: 

What status reports does Cash Management and forecasting include? 

Answer: 

A. Cash management position 

B. Liquidity forecast 

C. Credit limit report 

D. G/L account balances 

E. Bill holdings 

Question: 

Which of the following are clearing procedures in accounts receivable? 

Answer: 

A. Incoming payment 

B. Down payment request 

C. Credit memo 

D. Transfer posting 

Question: 

When creating an Overhead Cost Order, the first order information which 

must be entered is: 

Answer: 

A. Order status 

B. Order type 

287

C. Settlement type 

D. Currency 

E. Classification code 

Question: 

When creating an Overhead Cost Order, the settlement rule must be entered 

in the control data. 

Which settlement receivers are available for internal orders? 

Answer: 

A. Cost center 

B. Orders 

C. General ledger accounts 

D. Asset 

E. Vendor 

Question: 

In Controlling, a distinction is made between master data, planning, actual 

data and the information system. 

Which of the following master data belongs to Controlling? 

Answer: 

A. G/L account 

B. Work center 

C. Cost center 

D. Activity type 

E. Supplier 

Question: 

Withing Overhead Cost Controlling activities are calculated. A 

Sender/Receiver relationship exists. However, not all Sender/Receiver 

combinations are allowed. 

Which of the following combinations make business sense? 

Answer: 

A. Sender. Cost Center, Order, Project 

Receiver. Cost Center, Order, Project 

B. Sender. Order 

Receiver. Cost Center, Project 

C. Sender. Cost Center 

Receiver. Cost Center, Order, Project, Cost Object 

Question: 

Period closing activities are also performed in Controlling. This is 

dependent on certain prerequisites. Which of the following are MINIMUM 

criteria before it makes sense to carry out period closing? 

288

Answer: 

A. The posting period has been closed. 

B. Materials have been withdrawn. 

C. Personnel costs have been incurred. 

D. Overhead has been incurred. 

E. An order was closed. 

FI/CO Interview Questions 

What is APC? 

APC stands for Acquisition and Production costs. Acquisition means any asset which 

you may acquire/ purchase externally. It includes invoice price and other related 

exp. Associated with it like customs, octroi, freight which you add and arrive at total 

cost of acquisition for capitalization of the asset. For ex Say a computer. The total 

cost which you incur for the acquisition of the computer including installation will be 

your APC 

Production cost means any asset which is created internally within the organization. 

This is normally created by means of AUC and you go on adding cost to the AUC as 

and when you incur exp. for the same. For ex. say addition to the office building. 

Therefore APC includes any external acquisition or internal construction of exp. which 

needs to be capitalized. 

In OADB under 01 deprn area Acquisition & prod Cost tick is activated. 

This is umapathy, I have interview tomorrow, if anybody have taken 

interview with any company, kindly let me know what the questions they 

will be asking, how will be the interview. How the questions will be on 

configuration, implementation side and other questions plz.. Share with me. 

Pl. prepares yourself on the following broad lines: 

Implementation exp.: 

Brief about the project you did: w.r.t. the main activity of the client, How many 

plants they had, What modules were implemented, Who were the implementers, 

What‟s the implementation team size, How many were in your module team, What‟s 

your role in the project with respect to the activities you partook in the project, The 

Enterprise Structure with regard to the no. of Company Codes, any Business Areas 

or Profit Centers defined, Cost Centers defined, What‟s the period of the project, 

When did they Go-Live?, Any issues you‟d solved during „Support‟ phase? 

Questions on conceptual understanding: 

a) SAP R/3 definition and 3-Tier Architecture 

b) „Real time integration‟ advantage of SAP 

c) ASAP methodology 

d) Solution Manager 

e) Client / Company / Company Code / Business Area 

f) Business Area vs Profit Center Approach 

g) How effective will be the Financial Statements generated through Business 

289

Areas 

h) With Holding Taxes vs Extended WHT 

i) Field Status Concepts (G/L master fields controlled through Account Group and 

Document entry through Field Status Group set in the G/L master) 

j) Special G/L transactions 

k) Open item management 

l) Reconciliation Accounts 

m) Subsidiary Ledgers 

n) Sort key 

o) Negative Postings Allowed 

p) Special periods 

q) Only balances in local currency 

r) Important Posting keys for G/L, A/R, A/P, AA, Stock Entries 

s) Assessment vs Distribution 

t) Org. Structure for FI 

u) Org. Structure for CO 

v) Product Costing: How the values flow in the system 

Configuration: 

a) Extended With Holding Taxes configuration steps – right from creation of WH 

Tax Types, Codes to Annual Return 

b) FI-MM Integration (OBYC configuration with particular reference to Off-Setting 

entries) 

c) FI-SD integration 

d) Down Payments transactions 

e) Interest – Balances / Arrears 

f) Asset Accounting: Asset Class, Main Asset, Sub-Asset, Group Asset, Dep. 

Areas, Dep. Key, Transaction No.s (100- External acquisition, 210 – Retirement with 

Revenue, etc.), Imp. Transaction Codes. 

General questions: 

a) Educational Background 

b) What influenced you to go in for SAP career? 

c) Functional Career 

d) Present earnings vs Expected pay 

e) Inclination to relocate 

SAF FI Technical Interview Questions 2 

1. How can be or in what way baseline date is important in Automatic 

Payment Program run? 

The Baseline date is used to calculate the due date by taking into account the 

payment terms. On the APP, the baseline date helps to pick the relevant 

invoices for payment. During the APP run when invoices are pulled into the 

run, the system checks the „Next Payment Date‟ before picking the invoices to 

be paid. 

2. Please tell me the procurement cycle how it works? 

290

Procurement cycle – a sales order is placed on a requirement made by a 

customer, after which it is passed on to create a purchase order (this could either 

happen based on the requirements on the SO, or a planned SO). the value flow gets 

passed on to FI at the time of goods movement. In the case of SD, the impact on FI 

happens only at the time of billing. 

3. Difference between Depreciation, Accumulated Depreciation and APC? 

What is APC? 

Depreciation – a decrease in the value of an asset due to wear and tear 

Accumulated Depreciation – the total amount of depreciation calculated on a 

particular asset. 

APC – refers to Asset transactions other than depreciation 

4. What is GR/IR? What journal entries we should pass for this? 

The GR/IR – the goods receipt/Invoice Receipt account is used to post to whenever 

goods that are not yet invoiced have been received or when invoices arrive b4 the 

delivery of goods. 

During the time between the invoice being created and delivery of goods, there can 

be a timing difference, in order to accommodate this timing difference; a GR/IR 

account is maintained temporarily to record the flow. 

5. What are the accounting entries take place in MM and SD? 

Value from MM to FI is defined in OBYC…. on the material master the flow of values 

are assigned on the Costing, acctg, etc tabs where the system helps to post the 

necessary stock values into the appropriate GL accounts. Helps to determine, the GL 

accounts updated when there is a movement of goods. 

SD-FI - VKOA 

6. Can we assign one Controlling area to two different Company Codes (but 

the company codes having different fiscal years/different currencies? 

Company code should have same financial year, may have different currencies. 

You can assign 2 or more company codes to one controlling area as long as the chart 

of accounts is same. Furthermore, if you have different fiscal year variant in the 

company code, then make sure that the number of period remains the same. 

7. While posting transaction, can we give cost centre / production order at 

time. 

Yes it is possible, but in such situation cost centre will be real and production order 

is statically. 

If you assign both cost center and Prd Order then since Prod. Order are real co 

object, Cost center entry would be statistical. 

291

8. Which Master data uploads will be done? 

The question is not very clear. If you are talking about CO Master Data. Then Cost 

center need to be uploaded. You can use Data Transfer Workbench or write abap for 

it. 

9. Can we run Payment Program giving (HDFC vendor details ) City bank 

in Payment run program? 

Yes can be possible, this can resolved through ranking order and bank optimization 

in FBZP. 

You use further selection in proposal parameter, if you would like to filter the open 

item based on the city 

10. What does document header control? Field status. 

11. After entering a document can you delete the entry? Can you change the 

document? 

Which fields’ can/not is changed? 

Document header cannot be changed, after posting the document you cannot 

change. Only if you want to change the document the reseversal entry. 

12. What is a special GL transaction? 

The transaction other than A/P and A/R is called the special g/l transaction for ex: 

Bills of exchange, Interest payable, acquisition 

13. How do you reverse cleared documents? 

By doing reversal posting. 

14. What is base line date? Why is that used? Can this be changed? 

For payment terms it is used. Base line date is the due date. 

15. How many statistical objects can be selected in when you post an FI 

document? 

Where CCtr, PCtr, OM are active? 

Only two 

292

SAF FI Technical Interview Questions 1 

1. Tell me about FI Organizational structure? 

Ans: Client 

| 

Operating Concern 

| 

Controlling area1 Controlling Area 2 

| 

Co. Code 1 Co. Code 2 

| 

Bus area 1 Bus area2 Bus Area3 Bus Area 4 

2. How many Normal and Special periods will be there in fiscal year, why do 

u use special periods? 

Ans: 12 Normal posting period and 4 special periods are in the fiscal year which can 

be used for posting tax and audit adjustments to a closed fiscal year. 

3. Where do you open and close periods? 

Ans: PPV is used to open and close the periods based on a/c t ypes considering GL 

Accounts. Tr. Code. OB52. 

4. What do you enter in Company code Global settings? 

Ans: 4 digit alphanumeric key. 

Name of the company 

City 

Country 

Currency 

Language 

Address 

5.What is document type, and what does it control? Examples. 

Ans: Document type is nothing vouchers containing line items. Several business 

transactions can be identified within a particular document type. 

It controls the document number ranges. 

It controls the Header part of document 

IT controls the line item level of the document 

Helps filing of physical document 

6. What is posting key and what does it control? 

Ans: These are special classification keys. Two character numerical key it controls 

the entry of line items. 

Posting key determines Account type; Debit/credit posting, Field status of 

transaction. 

7. What is field status group, what does it control? 

Ans: FSG is mandatory field in GL Creation. You use this field to define which fields 

are displayed when you post business transactions to a G/L account. 

293

A field may have one of the following statuses. 

- Suppressed 

- Display , Optional 

- Required 

8. What is chart of account and how many charts of accounts can be 

assigned to a company? 

Ans: Chart of account is a list of all G/L accounts used by one or several company 

codes. 

For each G/L account, the chart of accounts contains the account number, account 

name, and the information that controls how an account functions and how a G/L 

account is created in a Company code. 

You have to assign a chart of accounts to each company code. This chart of accounts 

is the Operating chart of accounts and is used for the daily postings in this company 

code. 

You have the following options when using multiple company codes. 

You can use the same chart of accounts for all company codes 

If the company codes all have the same requirements for the chart of accounts set 

up, assign all of the individual company codes to the same chart of accounts. This 

could be the case if all company codes are in the same country. 

In addition to the operating chart of accounts, you can use two additional charts of 

accounts If the individual company codes need different charts of accounts, you can 

assign up to two charts of accounts in addition to the operating chart of accounts. 

This could be the case if company codes lie in multiple countries. 

The use of different charts of accounts has no effect on the balance sheet and profit 

and loss statement. When creating the balance sheet or the profit and loss 

statement, you can choose whether to balance the co! many codes which use 

different charts of accounts together or separately. 

9. What does definition of a chart of account contains? 

Ans: chart of account key 

Name 

Maintenance language 

Length of the GL Account Number 

Controlling Integration 

Group chart of accounts (Consolidation) 

Block Indicator 

10. Can one COA be assigned to several companies? 

Ans: yes. One COA can be assigned to several companies. 

11) What is account group and what does it control? 

Ans: Account group determines which fields you can configure on the G/L master 

record. It is necessary to have at least two one for B/S and another one for P&L a/c. 

294

It controls the Number ranges of GL A/C. 

The status of fields of the master record of GL belongs to company code area. 

12) What is reconciliation account; can you directly enter documents in that 

a/c? 

Ans: When you p! ost items to a subsidiary ledger, the system automatically posts 

the same data to the general ledger. Each subsidiary ledger has one or more 

reconciliation accounts in the general ledger. 

We can‟t use reconciliation account for direct postings. 

13) How do you control field status of GL master records and from where do 

you control! 

Ans: Field status variant is maintained all FSGs. 

14) What are the segments of GL master record? 

Ans:- COA Segment 

A/C group 

Nature of account 

Short text 

GL a/c long text 

Trading partner 

Group Account Number 

- Company code segment 

Account currency 

Tax 

Reconciliation a/c for a/c type 

OIM, LID,FSG. 

15) What does Field status group assigned to a GL master record controls? 

Ans: It controls the account assignments that are made to the account. Specifically 

the field status group controls whether postings to cost centers, internal orders, 

profitability segments and so on are required, not allowed (suppressed), or optional. 

16) What is Country and operational chart of account? Why do you use 

group chart of account? 

Ans: Operational chart of account – Day to day activities It is mandatory. 

Country COA – It‟s used for legal specific requirement of each country. It‟s additional 

and optional. 

Group COA used for consolidation of Company codes. This is for group consolidation 

purpose. 

17) What are all the segments in a Customer/Vendor master record? 

Ans: Segments in Customer Segments in Vendor 

- General Data segment General data segment 

- Company code segment Company code segment 

- Sales area segment purchasing organization Segment 

295

18) What is open line item management? What do you mean by clearing 

open line items? 

Ans: Open item management is further reconciliation function. OIM allows you to 

display the open and cleared items and amounts in an account. OIM should be used 

if an offsetting entry is made for every line item posted in the account. The a/c is 

reconciled and cleared against another account. Ex. Salary clearing account and 

GR/IR Clearing account. 

19) What is residual payment and part payment? 

Ans: Residual payment it clears original invoice with incoming amount and create 

new line item for remaining outstanding amount. 

Partial payment it leaves the original invoice amount and creates new 

line item for incoming amount. 

20) What is internal and external number ranges? 

Ans: Internal Number Ranges: Doc. No will be provided by the system automatically 

in serial order allotting the next available progressive number. The number must be 

in numerical. 

External Number ranges: Doc. No will be given manually by the end user. System 

will not lock no automatically in this case. User can pick the number randomly. 

Number may be an alpha numeric. 

All SAP Gurus, pls correct me if i am wrong. 

SAP FI/CO Sample Questions and Answers 1 

1. About evolution in the world of business, we can affirmative that (Please choose 

the correct sentence): 

a) [ ] The internet revolution could turn available to companies the use of ERP 

functionality. 

b) [ ] The next generation of “new dimensional” products appeared taking 

functionality out of the company, to bring value through extending the Internet 

Revolution. 

c) [ ] The internet has driven to a collaborative environment where value is created 

through collaboration within business communities. 

d) [ ] In the first the companies were looking at Cost reduction and efficiency 

through integration of business communities. 

2. About the definition of ERP and e-business functionalities, we can say that (Note: 

we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think 

they are correct): 

a) [ ] ERP offers enterprise centric functionality (general ledger, payroll, order entry) 

to integrate core, internal processes. 

b) [ ] ERP is my SAP Financials and my SAP HR. 

c) [ ] ERP is SAP R/3, while e-business is mySAP.com. 

d) [ ] About Business Model, ERP can be considered as enterprise centric and ebusiness, 

as extended and collaborative. 

e) [ ] About Architecture, ERP can be considered as an integrated system and e- 

296

usiness, as an integrated system and an open integration platform. 

f) [ ] About Processes, ERP can have them integrated, core within enterprises and 

collaborative, beyond company boundaries. 

3. What is a SAP Business Object (Please choose the correct sentence)? 

a) [ ] It is all the transaction data generated via transactions. 

b) [ ] It is the instancied class of the Class Builder. 

c) [ ] It is composed of tables that are related in a business context, including the 

related applications programs and it is maintained in the Class Repository. 

d) [ ] It is the representation of a central business object in the real world, such as 

an employee, sales order, purchase requisition, invoice and so on. 

e) [ ] It is a sequence of dialog steps that are consistent in a business context and 

that belong together logically. 

4. About BAPI (Business Application Programming Interface), what is true (Note: we 

can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they 

are correct)? 

a) [ ] It is a well-defined interface providing access to processes and data of 

business application systems. 

b) [ ] BAPIs offer a stable, standardized interface for integrating third-party 

applications and components in the Business Framework. 

c) [ ] A BAPI is assigned to one and only one business object. 

d) [ ] In the R/3 Enterprise version (4.7) we can use BAPI to create an internal 

order inside a customized ABAP program. 

e) [ ] A business object in the Business Object Repository (BOR) can have many 

methods from which one or several are implemented as BAPIs. 

5. What can we say about ALE (Application Link Enabling, Note: we can have more 

than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? 

a) [ ] Business processes cannot be distributed using ALE. 

b) [ ] The ALE concept is related to an enterprise structure with areas that have 

central tasks and areas with tasks that are decentralized. 

c) [ ] The applications are integrated via a central database. 

d) [ ] The applications are integrated via the message exchange. 

e) [ ] The ALE concept supports the implementation and operation of distributed 

SAP applications. 

6. A company code is: 

a) [ ] an independent accounting entity (the smallest organization element for which 

a complete self-contained set of accounts can be drawn up). 

b) [ ] an organizational unit in an enterprise that represents a closed system used 

for cost accounting purposes. 

c) [ ] an organizational unit that provides an additional evaluation level for the 

purpose of segment reporting, for example. 

d) [ ] a dependent accounting entity, according to Fiscal Year. 

e) [ ] the highest level in the R/3 system hierarchy. 

297

7. Consider the following sentences: 

7.1. The variant principle is a three-step method used in R/3 to assign special 

properties to one or more R/3 objects. 

7.2. One of the disadvantages to use variants is that it can't deal with the 

maintenance of properties, which are common among several business objects. 

7.3. For using the variant principle, you must define the variant, populate it with 

values and assign it to the R/3 objects. 

7.4. This principle is used for Fiscal Years, Posting Periods and so on. 

Which of them is false? 

a) [ ] 7.1 and 7.2. 

b) [ ] 7.1 and 7.3. 

c) [ ] 7.1. 

d) [ ] 7.2. 

e) [ ] 7.3. 


8.1. A fiscal year has to be defined by means of separating business transactions into 

different periods. 

8.2. Special periods are used for postings, which are related to the process of the 

year-end closing. In total, 16 special periods can be used. 

8.3. The Fiscal Year variant only defines the amount of periods and their start and 

finish dates. 

8.4. The Fiscal Year is defined as a variant, which is assigned to the chart of 

accounts. 

Which of them are true? 

a) [ ] 8.1 and 8.2. 

b) [ ] 8.1 and 8.3. 

c) [ ] 8.2 and 8.3. 

d) [ ] 8.2 and 8.4. 

e) [ ] 8.3 and 8.4. 

9. What is an independent fiscal year variant (Please choose the correct sentence)? 

a) [ ] It is a variant which the postings periods are only equal to the months of the 

year. 

b) [ ] It is a variant which you can define different number of periods, according to 

the year. 

c) [ ] It is a variant which each own fiscal year uses the same number of periods, 

and the postings periods always start and end at the same day of the year. 

d) [ ] It is a variant which allows the use of different number of posting periods. 

e) [ ] It is a variant not normally used because of its particularity. 

10. Consider the following statements about currencies concepts: 

298

10.1. The currency code identifies each currency that will be used into R/3 system. 

10.2. You have to define the entire world‟s currency into R/3 system 

10.3. Exchange rate types distinguish the exchange rates to be considered for 

various purposes, such as valuation, translation, conversion, planning, etc. 

Which of them is true (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please 

select the sentences you think they are correct)? 

a) [ ] 10.1. 

b) [ ] 10.2. 

c) [ ] 10.3. 

d) [ ] none of them. 

e) [ ] all of them. 


11.1. A base currency can be assigned to an exchange rate type. 

11.2. To deal with exchange rate spreads, two very efficient combinations of the 

exchange rate tools are using a base currency for the average rate (M) and using the 

exchange rate spreads to calculate the buying and selling rates (B and G). 

11.3. A base currency can be used for an average, a buying or a selling rate. 

11.4. The relations between currencies have to be maintained per exchange rate 

type and currency pair in the translation factors. 

Which of these combinations is true? 

a) [ ] 11.1, 11.3 and 11.4. 

b) [ ] 11.1, 11.2 and 11.4. 

c) [ ] 11.2, 11.3 and 11.4. 

d) [ ] 11.1, 11.2 and 11.3. 

e) [ ] 11.1, 11.2, 11.3 and 11.4. 

12. Consider the following sentences about the direct quotation: 

12.1. It is also known as price notation. 

12.2. The currency value is expressed in units of the foreign currency per unit of 

local currency. 

12.3. For direct quotation, the prefix to indicate the rate is Â“/Â”. 

What is the correct option? 

a) [ ] 12.1. 

b) [ ] 12.2. 

c) [ ] 12.3. 

d) [ ] none of them. 

e) [ ] all of them. 

13. Consider the following sentences about the indirect quotation: 

299

13.1. It is also known as volume notation. 

13.2. The currency value is expressed in the local currency per unit of foreign 

currency. 

13.3. For indirect quotation, there is no prefix to difference between direct quotation. 

What is the correct option? 

a) [ ] all of them. 

b) [ ] none of them. 

c) [ ] 12.3. 

d) [ ] 12.2. 

e) [ ] 12.1. 

14. What of these alternatives are considered master data (Note: we can have more 


a) [ ] Chart of Accounts. 

b) [ ] G/L Accounts. 

c) [ ] Vendor. 

d) [ ] Customer. 

e) [ ] Asset. 

15. What can we define into the chart of accounts customizing transaction (OB13 

transaction, Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the 

sentences you think they are correct)? 

a) [ ] Description. 

b) [ ] Maintenance language. 

c) [ ] Length of the company code. 

d) [ ] Length of the G/L account number. 

e) [ ] Blocking / unblocking chart of accounts. 

16. Consider the following sentences about the chart of accounts segment: 

16.1. It contains the Company Code, Account number and the field status group. 

16.2. Whenever you need to enter information for a company code for an account 

number, you have to type again the information related to chart of accounts 

segment. 

16.3. Texts can be displayed using the program “Account assignment 

manual”(RFSKTH00). 

16.4. Key words facilitate the search for account numbers. 

Which of these combinations are false (Note: we can have more than one correct 

sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? 

a) [ ] 16.1. 

b) [ ] 16.2. 

c) [ ] 16.3. 

d) [ ] 16.4. 

e) [ ] none of them. 

300

17. True or false? 

17.1. Every company code that needs to use an account from the assigned chart of 

accounts has to create its own company code segment. 

a) [ ] True b) [ ] False 

17.2. For P+L statement accounts, the balance is carried forward to the same 

account. 


17.3. In the chart of accounts segment, it is necessary to indicate whether the 

account will be a balance sheet or a profit+loss statement account. 


17.4. Number intervals for G/L account master records can overlap. 


17.5. It is not possible to influence the appearance of an account‟s master data. 


18. Consider the following sentences about field status: 

18.1. Fields which are _____________ can be ____________. 

18.2. Fields which have an entry that ________________ can be set to 

_________ only (even in change mode). 

Which of the options below matches the blank spaces of those sentences? 

a) [ ] used/suppressed for 18.1; must be changed/display for 18.2. 

b) [ ] not used/suppressed for 18.1; must be changed/display for 18.2. 

c) [ ] not used/optional for 18.1; should not be changed/suppressed for 18.2. 

d) [ ] not used/suppressed for 18.1; should not be changed /display for 18.2. 

e) [ ] used/optional for 18.1; must be changed/display for 18.2. 

19. Consider the following sentences about field status: 

19.1. Fields which _____________ can be made ____________. 

19.2. Fields that can be entered, but are not required, can be set to _________ 

entry. 

Which of the options below matches the blank spaces of those sentences? 

a) [ ] must not have an entry/optional for 19.1; suppressed for 19.2. 

b) [ ] must have an entry/suppressed for 19.1; suppressed for 19.2. 

c) [ ] must have an entry/optional for 19.1; optional for 19.2. 

d) [ ] must have an entry/required for 19.1; optional for 19.2. 

e) [ ] must not have an entry/required for 19.1; optional for 19.2. 


301

20.1. Reconciliation accounts are general ledger accounts assigned to the business 

partner master records to record all transactions in the sub-ledger. 

20.2. For accounts without line item display, the most important data from the 

posted line items is stored in a special index table. 

20.3. The account currency must be in the local currency. 

20.4. Items in accounts with open item management means the G/L accounts should 

have a offsetting posting for a given business transaction. 

Which of these are true (Please choose the correct sentence)? 

a) [ ] 20.1 and 20.3. 

b) [ ] 20.2 and 20.4. 

c) [ ] 20.1 and 20.2. 

d) [ ] 20.2 and 20.3. 

e) [ ] 20.1 and 20.4. 

Answers: 

1. C 

2. A, C, D, E. 

3. D 

4. A, B, C, D, E. 

5. B, D, E. 

6. A 

Item Â“BÂ” is the definition of controlling area. 

Item Â“CÂ” is the definition of business area. 

Item Â“DÂ” is not any definition. 

Item Â“EÂ” is the definition of client. 

7. D 

In fact, the main advantage of using variants is that it is easier to 

maintain properties, which are common among several business objects. 

8. B 

9. C 

10. A, C. 

Most of the world‟s currencies are already defined into R/3 system. 

11. B 

Be careful: A base currency can only be used for an average rate, not for a selling or 

a buying rate. 

12. A 

13. E 

14. B, C, D, E. 

A chart of accounts is a variant, which contains the structure and the basic 

information about general ledger accounts. 

302

15. A, B, D, E. 

16. A, B. 

17. True or false: 

17.1. True. 

17.2. False. For P+L statement accounts the balance is carried forward to a retained 

earnings account and the P+L statement account is set to zero. 

17.3. True. 

17.4. True. 

17.5. False. It is possible to influence the appearance of an account‟s master data 

using the field status. 

18. D 

19. D 

20. E 

SAP FI/CO Sample Questions and Answers 2 

1. Since the line item display takes up additional system resources, you should only 

use it if there is no other way of looking at the line items. So, you should not activate 

the line item display for the following accounts (Note: we can have more than one 

correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct): 

a) [ ] P+L Statement. 

b) [ ] Reconciliation. 

c) [ ] Revenue. 

d) [ ] Material Stock. 

e) [ ] Tax. 

2. Consider the following statements: 

2.1. Accounts with open item management must have line item display activated. 

2.2. You can activate or deactivate open item management every time, even if the 

account hasn‟t a zero balance. 

2.3. You can select both local and foreign currencies as account currency. 

2.4. If the account is the local currency, the account can only be posted to this 

currency. 

2.5. When using the “Only Balances in Local Currency” indicator in the master data 

record, transaction figures are only managed for amounts translated into local 

currency. 

Which of the above statements are true (Note: we can have more than one correct 


a) [ ] 2.1. 

b) [ ] 2.2. 

c) [ ] 2.3. 

d) [ ] 2.4. 

e) [ ] 2.5. 


303

3.1. The “Only Balances in Local Currency” indicator must not be set in reconciliation 

accounts for customers or vendors. 

a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 

3.2. The “Only Balances in Local Currency” indicator is usually set in balance sheet 

accounts that are not managed in foreign currencies and not managed on an open 

item basis. 


3.3. Accounts with a foreign currency as an account currency can be posted to any 

currency. 


3.4. You can use a group chart of accounts for internal purposes. 


3.5. The usage of a financial statement version for the group chart of accounts is 

optional. 


4. What is the disadvantage of using the group chart of accounts (Please choose the 

correct sentence)? 

a) [ ] Because changes to existing G/L Accounts are effective as soon as they have 

been saved and could have extensive consequences. 

b) [ ] Because accounts with the account currency as local currency can only be 

posted to this local currency. 

c) [ ] Because the company codes use different operational chart of accounts, you 

cannot carry out cross-company code controlling. 

d) [ ] Because the group chart of accounts must be assigned to each operational 

chart of accounts. 

e) [ ] Because you must enter the group account number in the chart of accounts 

segment of the operational account. 


5.1. You cannot use the country chart of accounts if you desire to use the crosscompany 

code controlling. 

5.2. The disadvantage of using country chart of accounts is the accounting clerks 

who may be familiar with the country chart of accounts first have to get used to 

using the operational chart of accounts. 

5.3. Reconciliation accounts are updated on a daily basis. 

Which of them are false (Please choose the correct sentence)? 

a) [ ] 5.1 and 5.2. 

b) [ ] 5.1 and 5.3. 

c) [ ] 5.2 and 5.3. 

d) [ ] all of them. 

e) [ ] none of them. 

304

6. Which are the segments of the SD view of the customer account master data 

(Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you 

think they are correct)? 

a) [ ] Client. 

b) [ ] Company Code. 

c) [ ] Controlling Area. 

d) [ ] Sales Area. 

e) [ ] Purchasing Organization. 

7. Which are the segments of the MM view of the customer account master data 

(Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you 

think they are correct)? 






8. What is the segment that makes complete both customer and vendor accounts 

(Please choose the correct sentence)? 






9. What characteristics are configured as standard for every customer/vendor 

account (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the 

sentences you think they are correct)? 

a) [ ] Line Item Display. 


c) [ ] Currency. 

d) [ ] Open Item Management. 



10.1. Number ranges for customer/vendor accounts can overlap. 

10.2. An one-time account is a special customer/vendor master record which a 

company rarely do business. 

10.3. The account group is used to control the fields displayed in the master record. 

10.4. If you enter an alternative payer, the amount to clear the open items due in 

the account is paid by the alternative payer. 

10.5. One number range can only be assigned to one account group. 

305

Which of the above statements are true (Note: we can have more than one correct 


a) [ ] 10.1. 

b) [ ] 10.2. 

c) [ ] 10.3. 

d) [ ] 10.4. 

e) [ ] 10.5. 


11.1. For every bank that is used in the system (for example, as a house bank or as 

a customer/vendor bank) you have to create a bank master record. 


11.2. Banks that are used by your company are defined as house banks.a) [ ] True. 

b) [ ] False. 

11.3. You cannot create bank master data when entering bank information in the 

customer or vendor master record. 


11.4. Bank Account and G/L Account are the same master data object. 


11.5. Customers that use the lockbox function can create a batch input session that 

automatically updates customer banking information in the master record. 



12.1. The system can assign the document numbers or the user can assign 

the number during document entry. 

12.1. A business transaction creates only one document. 

12.3. Document types are defined at company code level. 

12.4. Number ranges for document numbers and account types defined for postings 

are defined by the document types. 

12.5. Document types also define whether invoices are posted with the net 

procedure. 

Choose the correct option: 

a) [ ] 12.1, 12.4 and 12.5 are correct. 

b) [ ] 12.2, 12.4 and 12.5 are correct. 

c) [ ] 12.3, 12.4 and 12.5 are correct. 

d) [ ] 12.1, 12.3 and 12.4 are correct. 

e) [ ] 12.1, 12.2 and 12.5 are correct. 

306

13. What do the posting keys specify (Note: we can have more than one correct 


a) [ ] Whether the line item is connected to a payment transaction or not. 

b) [ ] Whether the posting is sales-relevant and the sales figure of the account is to 

be updated by the transaction, for example, by the posting of a customer invoice. 

c) [ ] Whether the line items contain “credit” or “debit” values. 

d) [ ] Whether the line items are valid for a business transaction. 

e) [ ] Whether the accounts are allowed for posting. 


14.1. A company code must be assigned to a posting period variant to have the 

control for posting periods. 

14.2.„+‟ symbol represents all account types in the posting period customizing 

screen. 

14.3. The account interval in the posting period customizing screen can be both G/L 

and sub ledger accounts. 

14.4. The maximum amounts are defined per company code in “tolerance groups”. 

14.5. It is not possible to assign tolerance groups to user logon ID‟s. 

Choose the correct option: 

a) [ ] 14.1, 14.4 and 14.5 are correct. 

b) [ ] 14.2, 14.4 and 14.5 are correct. 

c) [ ] 14.3, 14.4 and 14.5 are correct. 

d) [ ] 14.1, 14.2 and 14.4 are correct. 

e) [ ] 14.1, 14.2 and 14.5 are correct. 

15. What fields of a FI Document Header section can be changed after a document 

has already been posted (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please 

select the sentences you think they are correct)? 

a) [ ] Fiscal Year. 

b) [ ] Reference Number. 

c) [ ] Text fields. 

d) [ ] Header text. 

e) [ ] Posting date. 

16. About the change control, what conditions below are applicable (Note: we can 

have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are 

correct)? 

16.1. The posting period is already closed. 

16.2. The line item is not yet cleared. 

16.3. The document is a credit memo for an invoice. 

16.4. The document is not a credit memo from a down payment. 

16.5. The line item is either a debit in a customer account or a credit in a vendor 

account. 

307

a) [ ] 16.1. 

b) [ ] 16.2. 

c) [ ] 16.3. 

d) [ ] 16.4. 

e) [ ] 16.5. 

17. What are the prerequisites to enable negative postings (Note: we can have more 


a) [ ] You have to define reversal reasons for negative reversal. 

b) [ ] You have to ensure company code permits negative post ings. 

c) [ ] You have to define the document type that explicitly allows negative postings. 

d) [ ] You have to use cleared items. 

e) [ ] You have to reset cleared items. 

18. What is the purpose of the terms of payment (Please choose the correct 

sentence)? 

a) [ ] Calculate a cash discount and invoice due date. 

b) [ ] Calculate the tax amounts. 

c) [ ] Enable the cross-company code transactions. 

d) [ ] Define the baseline date. 

e) [ ] Calculate only the required conditions for SD invoices. 


19.1. Terms of payments are copied from invoice to credit memos when they are 

linked to. 

19.2. Inserting a Â“VÂ” in the invoice reference field during document entry means 

the terms of payment are activated in the 

non-invoice-related credit memos. 

19.3. The account type field in terms of payment basic data screen should be defined 

separately, to prevent any done change in the term of payment. 

19.4. The system cannot define the splitment of an installment payment; at least 

you define it in the terms of payment. 

19.5. The day limits define the dates of the cash discount periods. 

Which of the statements above is false (Please choose the correct sentence)? 

a) [ ] 19.1. 

b) [ ] 19.2. 

c) [ ] 19.3. 

d) [ ] 19.4. 

e) [ ] 19.5. 


20.1. SAP supports tax on sales and purchases, US sales tax, additional taxes and 

withholding tax as tax systems for different countries. 


308

20.2. Only national level of taxation is allowed in the R/3 system. 


20.3. A tax calculation procedure is assigned to every company code for carrying out 

tax calculations. 


20.4.A jurisdiction code is a combination of the codes of tax authorities that tax 

movements of goods and use their own tax rates. 


20.5. If you desire to post manual tax postings, you have to flag the “Post 

Automatically Only” field of the account master record. 


Answers: 

1. B, C, D, E. 

2. A, C, E. 


3.1. True. 

3.2. True. 

3.3. False. Accounts with a foreign currency as an account currency can only be 

posted to in this foreign currency. 

3.4. True. 

3.5. False. You must use a financial statement version for the group chart of 

accounts. 

4. C. 

Item “a” is related to Collective Processing for G;L Accounts Master Data. 

Item “b” is not true for the R/3 system concept. If the account currency is the local 

currency, the account can be posted to in any currency. 

Item “d” and “e” are some actions to be done for using group chart of accounts, so, 

they are not the disadvantage. 

5. B. 

In fact, since all company codes use the same operational chart of accounts for 

postings, you can carry out cross-company code controlling. About Reconciliation 

accounts, they are updated real time. 

6. A, D. 

7. A, E. 

8. B. 

9. A, D. 

10. B, C, D. 

NOTE: A number range can be assigned to several account groups. 


11.1. True. 

11.2. True. 

309

11.3. False. In fact, we can create bank master data when entering bank 

information in the customer or vendor master record. 

11.4. False. Each bank account is reflected in the SAP System by a combination of 

house bank ID and account ID. This combination is entered in a G/L account that 

represents the bank accounting the general ledger. 

11.5. True. 

12. A. 

13. A, B, C, E. 

14. D. 

15. B, C. 

16. B, D, E. 

17. A, B, C. 

18. A. 

19. E. 

The day limits are used to store several versions of terms of payment under the 

same terms of payment key. 


20.1. True. 

20.2. False. Two types of taxation can be represented in the R/3 system: taxation at 

national level and taxation at regional/jurisdiction level. 

20.3. False. A tax calculation procedure is assigned to every country for carrying out 

tax calculations. 

20.4. True 

20.5. False. If you have selected this field, no manual tax postings are allowed. 

FI-AR-AR (FBD) Accounts Receivable: Basic Functions - Customers 

Customer Master Credit Management: KUNNR 

Central Data KNKK 

Customer Master Credit Management: KUNNR / KKBER 

Control Area Data KNKKF1 

Credit Management : FI Status data LOGSYS / KUNNR / KKBER / REGUL 

RFRR 

Accounting Data – A/R and A/P RELID / SRTFD / SRTF2 

Information System FI-BL-PT 

Bank Accounting: Payment (BFIBL_CHECK_D) Transactions – General 

Sections 

310

PAYR Payment Medium File ZBUKR / HBKID / HKTID / RZAWE 

/ CHECT 

PCEC Pre-numbered Check ZBUKR / HBKID / HKTID / STAPL 

FI-BL-PT-AP (FMZA) 

Bank Accounting: Payment Transactions – Automatic Payments 

Global Settings for Payment Program for MANDT 

Payment Requests FDZA 

As Management Line Items in Payment KEYNO 

Requests PAYRQ 

Payment Requests KEYNO 

Important Tables in SAP CO 

Controlling 

Table Name Description Important Fields 

AUSP Characteristic Values MANDT / OBJEK / ATINN / ATZHL 

CO-KBAS Overhead Cost Controlling 

A132 Price per Cost Center MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL / KOKRS 

A136 Price per Controlling Area MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL / KOKRS 

A137 Price per Country / Region MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL / KOKRS 

COSC CO Objects: Assignment of Original MANDT / OBJNR / SCTYP / 

VERSN 

CSSK Cost Center / Cost Element MANDT / VERSN / KOKRS / GJAHR 

CSSL Cost Center / Activity Type MANDT / KOKRS / KOSTL / LSTAR 

311

KAPS CO Period Locks MANDT / KOKRS / GJAHR / VERSN 

CO-KBASCORE Overhead Cost Controlling: General Services 

CSKA Cost Elements (Data Dependent on MANDT / KTOPL / KSTAR 

CSKB Cost Elements (Data Dependent on MANDT / KOKRS / KSTAR / 

DATBI 

CSKS Cost Center Master Data MANDT / KOKRS / KOSTL / DATBI 

CSLA Activity Master MANDT / KOKRS / LSTAR / DATBI 

CO-OM (KACC) Overhead Cost Controlling 

COBK CO Object: Document Header MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR 

COEJ CO Object: Line Items (by Fiscal MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR / BUZEI 

COEJL CO Object: Line Items for Activity MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR / 

BUZEI 

COEJR CO Object: Line Items for SKF (by MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR / 

BUZEI 

COEJT CO Object: Line Items for Prices MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR / BUZEI 

COEP CO Object: Line Items (by Period) MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR / 

BUZEI 

COEPL CO Object: Line Items for Activity MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR / 

BUZEI 

COEPR CO Object: Line Items for SKF (by MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR / 

BUZEI 

COEPT CO Object: Line Items for Prices MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR / BUZEI 

COKA CO Object: Control Data for Cost MANDT / OBJNR / GJAHR / 

KSTAR 

COKL CO Object: Control Data for Activ MANDT / LEDNR / OBJNR / GJAHR 

COKP CO Object: Control Data for Prima MANDT / LEDNR / OBJNR / 

GJAHR 

COKR CO Object: Control Data for Stati MANDT / LEDNR / OBJNR / GJAHR 

312

COKS CO Object: Control Data for Secon MANDT / LEDNR / OBJNR / 

GJAHR 

CO-OM-CEL (KKAL) Cost Element Accounting (Reconciliation Ledger) 

COFI01 Object Table for Reconciliation L MANDT / OBJNR 

COFI02 Transaction Dependent Fields for MANDT / OBJNR 

COFIP Single Plan Items for Reconciliation RCLNT / GL_SIRID 

COFIS Actual Line Items for Reconciliation RCLNT / GL_SIRID 

CO-OM-CCA Cost Center Accounting (Cost Accounting Planning RK-S) 

– What is RK-S 

A138 Price per Company Code MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL / KOKRS 

A139 Price per Profit Center MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL / KOKRS 

CO-OM-OPA (KABR) Overhead Orders: Application Development R/3 Cost 

Accounting Settlement 

AUAA Settlement Document: Receiver Seg MANDT / BELNR / LFDNR 

AUAB Settlement Document: Distribution MANDT / BELNR / BUREG / 

LFDNR 

AUAI Settlement Rules per Depreciation MANDT / BELNR / LFDNR / AFABE 

AUAK Document Header for Settlement MANDT / BELNR 

AUAO Document Segment: CO Objects to b MANDT / BELNR / LFDNR 

AUAV Document Segment: Transactions MANDT / BELNR / LFDNR 

COBRA Settlement Rule for Order Settlem MANDT / OBJNR 

COBRB Distribution Rules Settlement Rul MANDT / OBJNR / BUREG / 

LFDNR 

CO-OM-OPA (KAUF) Overhead Orders: Cost Accounting Orders 

AUFK Order Master Data MANDT / AUFNR 

AUFLAY0 Entity Table: Order Layouts MANDT / LAYOUT 

EC-PCA (KE1) Profit Center Accounting 

313

CEPC Profit Center Master Data Table MANDT / PRCTR / DATBI / KOKRS 

CEPCT Texts for Profit Center Master Da MANDT / SPRAS / PRCTR / DATBI 

CEPC_BUKRS Assignment of Profit Center to a MANDT / KOKRS / PRCTR / 

BUKRS 

GLPCA EC-PCA: Actual Line Items RCLNT / GL_SIRID 

GLPCC EC-PCA: Transaction Attributes MANDT / OBJNR 

GLPCO EC-PCA: Object Table for Account MANDT / OBJNR 

GLPCP EC-PCA: Plan Line Items RCLNT / GL_SIRID 

EC-PCA BS (KE1C) PCA Basic Settings: Customizing for Profit Center 

Accounting 

A141 Dependent on Material and Receive MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL / 

KOKRS 

A142 Dependent on Material MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL / WERKS 

A143 Dependent on Material Group MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL / 

WERKS 

Important Tables in SAP AA 

FI-AA-AA (AA) Asset Accounting: Basic Functions – Master Data 

ANKA Asset Classes: General Data ANLKL 

ANKP Asset Classes: Fld Cont Dpndnt on Chart ANLKL / AFAPL 

of Depreciation 

ANKT Asset Classes: Description SPRAS / ANLKL 

ANKV Asset Classes: Insurance Types ANLKL / VRSLFD 

ANLA Asset Master Record Segment BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 

314

ANLB Depreciation Terms BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 / AFABE 

/ BDATU 

ANLT Asset Texts SPRAS / BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 

ANLU Asset Master Record User Fields .INCLUDE / BUKRS / ANLN1 

/ANLN2 

ANLW Insurable Values (Year Dependent) BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 / 

VRSLFD / 

GJAHR 

ANLX Asset Master Record Segment BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 

ANLZ Time Dependent Asset Allocations BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 / 

BDATU 

FI-AA-AA (AA2) Asset Accounting: Basic Functions – Master Data 2.0 

ANAR Asset Types ANLAR 

ANAT Asset Type Text SPRAS / ANLAR 

FI-AA-AA (AB) Asset Accounting: Basic Functions – 

Asset Accounting 

ANEK Document Header Asset Posting BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 / 

GJAHR / 

LNRAN 

ANEP Asset Line Items BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 / GJAHR / 

LNRAN / AFABE 

ANEV Asset Downpymt Settlement BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 / 

GJAHR / 

LNRANS 

ANKB Asset Class: Depreciation Area ANLKL / AFAPL / AFABE / BDATU 

ANLC Asset value Fields BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 / GJAHR / 

315

AFABE 

ANLH Main Asset Number BUKRS / ANLN1 

ANLP Asset Periodic Values BUKRS / GJAHR / PERAF / AFBNR / 

ANLN1 / ANLN2 / AFABER 

FI-SL-VSR (GVAL) Special Purpose Ledger: Validation, Substitution and 

Rules 

GB03 Validation / Substitution User VALUSER 

GB92 Substitutions SUBSTID 

GB93 Validation VALID 

SAF FI Frequently Asked Questions 1 

1. Whether any FI document will be created during PO(Purchase order)? If 

please mention the entry also. 

2. What factors differentiates from one dunning level and other dunning 

level? 

3. APP There will be many banks in a house bank. If the payment should be 

maid from particular bank GL account. Where it is need to configure. 

4. What are various types of servers in SAP R/3 

5. Can anybody explain me FI-MM integartion.pl explain in detail 

i. Movement types 

ii. Account class 

iii. Material types 

6. Maximum no. of dunning levels are created? 

7. In how many ways APP is configured 

8. What is diff between AAM, Recurring entries, Sample document? 

Find here with the answers for your questions 

1. Whether any FI document will be created during PO (Purchase order)? If Pl 

mention the entry also? 

Ans: There is no document that is created in FI side during PO. But in controlling 

there can be a commitment posting to a Cost Center. The offsetting entry is posted 

at the time of GR. 

2. What factors differentiates from one dunning level and other dunning level 

316

Ans: The most important thing that differentiates the dunning levels is the dunning 

texts. The dunning text defines the urgency of the dunning notice. The other things 

can be the dunning charges, minimum & maximum amounts etc. 

3. APP 

There will be many banks in a house bank. If the payment should be maid from 

particular bank GL account. Where it is configured. 

Ans: There can be several accounts in the same house bank. We should assign the 

GL accounts exclusively at the time of creating the Bank master data and the bank 

accounts. Accordingly we can do the bank determination in FBZP for the individual 

banks and the corresponding sub accounts. 

Tr code for Defining bank: FI12. 

4. What are various types of servers in SAP R/3? 

Ans: The Typical SAP landscape looks something like figure 1.4 below: 

5. Can anybody explain me FI-MM integartion.pl explain in detail 

i. Movement types: 

Classification key indicating the type of material movement (for example, goods 

receipt, goods issue, physical stock transfer). 

The movement type enables the system to find predefined posting rules determining 

how the accounts of the financial accounting system (stock and consumption 

accounts) are to be posted and how the stock fields in the material master record are 

to be updated. 

ii. Valuation class 

Assignment of a material to a group of G/L accounts 

Along with other factors, the valuation class determines the G/L accounts that are 

updated as a result of a valuation-relevant transaction or event, such as a goods 

movement. 

The valuation class makes it possible to: 

- Post the stock values of materials of the same material type to different G/L 

accounts 

- Post the stock values of materials of different material types to the same G/L 

account 

iii. Transaction/Event Key 

317

Key allowing the user to differentiate between the various transactions and events 

(such as physical inventory transactions and goods movements) that occur within 

the field of inventory management. 

The transaction/event type controls the filing/storage of documents and the 

assignment of document numbers. 

iv. Material Type 

Groups together materials with the same basic attributes, for example, raw 

materials, semi finished products, or finished products. 

When creating a material master record, you must assign the material to a material 

type. The material type you choose determines: 

- Whether the material is intended for a specific purpose, for example, as a 

configurable 

material or process material 

- Whether the material number can be assigned internally or externally 

- The number range from which the material number is drawn 

- Which screens appear and in what sequence 

- Which user department data you may enter 

- What procurement type the material has; that is, whether it is manufactured inhouse 

or 

procured externally, or both 

Together with the plant, the material type determines the material's inventory 

management requirement that is: 

- Whether changes in quantity are updated in the material master record 

- Whether changes in value are also updated in the stock accounts in financial 

accounting 

6. Maximum no. of dunning levels is created? 

Ans: 9 levels maximum. 

7. In how many ways APP is configured? 

Tr Code: FBZP 

8. What is diff between AAM, Recurring entries, Sample document? 

Account Assignment Model: 

A reference for document entry that provides default values for posting business 

transactions. An account assignment model can contain any number of G/L account 

items and can be changed or supplemented at any time. In contrast to sample 

318

documents, the G/L account items for account assignment models may be 

incomplete. 

Recurring Entries: 

A periodically recurring posting made by the recurring entry program on the basis of 

recurring entry original documents. 

The procedure is comparable with a standing order by which banks are authorized to 

debit rent payments, payment contributions or loan repayments. 

Sample Documents: 

Special type of reference document. Data from this document is used to create 

default entries on the accounting document entry screen. 

Unlike an accounting document, a sample document does not update transaction 

figures but merely serves as a data source for an accounting document. 

SAF FI Frequently Asked Questions 2 

1. Where to assign activity type in cost centers? OR how to link cost centers 

& activity types? 

>> There is no direct assignment. You plan the output for a cost center first in 

kp26. Then you've to plan the value of that cost center which you budget for a 

period in kp06. Planned Activity expenditure / Planned Activity qty gives yia 

planned act rate which you can use to valuate your activity confirmations in mfg 

orders. You can also define your own prices, but you have to run the price 

revaluation if you want to revaluate your actual activity prices. 

2. For stat. key figure what is the significance of sender & receiver cost 

elements & cost centers? 

>> Stat key fig are not real account assignments. In simple traditional terms it is 

the base to allocate or define proportions with which the cost is allocated. SKFs are 

used to calculate the debit on a receiver object. These values can be used for 

assessing common costs which are used by all the other cost centers. 

3. How SKF works... Kindly give me T Codes Also. 

>> You create & plan SKF. 

Create using KK01 & PLAN the parameters of SKF in KP46 

1. Does any one know what is Software life cycle, it was a question asked in 

an interview. 

2. In GL master we have a option "Balance in local currency" and "Account 

currency". What does it mean? 

319

3. In movement type(MM), what is value & quantity string I know it 

updates values and quantities in GL with mix of valuation class, transaction 

key modifier and GL A/c. But how does it work when doing a mvt type? 

4. In FI when doing Special GL transaction what determines the fields’ 

statues of the screen and why do we have so many screens followed by it. 

Is it determined by posting Keys? is it to determine Account type for which 

we are using the Special GL and debit and credit? 

Q: Software Life Cycle, 

Ans: it is nothing but Road Map - five phases like, Project Preparation, Blue print, 

Realization, Final preparation and Go-live support. 

Q: In GL master we have a option "Balance in local currency" and "Account 

currency”. What does it mean? 

Ans: Account currency is that the GL account in which currency do you want to 

maintain. if you decided that you want maintain in company code currency, you can 

post any currency in that account. 

If not, you want to maintain separate currency for that GL then exchange rate 

difference will come because the conversion rate. 

Balance in local currency - some GL account can't be maintain on open item basis 

and can't in foreign currency like clearing account and discount account etc., in such 

case you can assign this indicator to show the balance in local currency. 

Q. In movement type (MM), what is value & quantity string I know it updates values 

and quantities in GL with mix of valuation class, transaction key modifier and GL A/c. 

But how does it work when doing a mvt type? 

Ans: Basically, the system does not know which GL has to be updated with what. 

here, we are giving a direction to the system to update the data. 

What you said is correct; the system will update the value and qty in the material 

master. You would have seen some more fields also, like Movement indicator, 

consumption, value string and transaction event key etc., 

While creating a PO, the system will take the Movement type as a base, with MT, it 

will identify the MI(movement indicator - used to define whether it is goods 

movement for production order, purchase order, delivery note etc), and it will 

identify the consumption,( like it is assets, or consumption or sales order) and it will 

identify the value string ( it is must to assigned to movement type, through 

allocation of value string to movement type, system will automatically identify the GL 

) and it will post the entry (dr/cr)in the GL based on the transaction and event key 

figure which is used to determine the debit and credit entry of a GL 

4. In Field Status Group there are options like Suppress, optional, Required, 

Display. So that it is followed by so many screens and it is determined by posting 

key. Its both debit (or) (Both) credit. 

320

Questionnaire with Answers for SAP FI 

What is the difference between company and company code? 

A company is the organizational unit used in the legal consolidation module to roll up 

financial statements of several company codes. 

The Company Code is the smallest organizational! Unit for which a complete selfcontained 

set of accounts can be drawn up for purposes of external reporting. 

How many chart of accounts can be attached to a company code? 

One or more Operative Chart of Accounts can be assigned to a company code. A COA 

must be assigned to a company code. This COA is the operative COA and is used in 

both FI and CO. One Chart of Account can be assigned too many Company codes 

i.e., multiple company codes can either share the same or have separate COA. But a 

company code (Country specific Company code or International Company code) can 

have a country specific COA also along with Operative COA. The link between the 

regular COA and the country COA appears in the alternate number field of the G/L 

master record. 

Eg: If a company's subsidiaries are located in both US & Mexico. We need to 

configure 2 Company codes - one for US and another for México, for eg U100 and 

M100. The same way we create 2 COA's one for US & one for Mexico, USCA and 

MXCA. Mexico has different govt reporting requirements than the US so we will need 

to define a company code specific to Country Mexico and also create a country 

specific COA to be used, in addition to normal COA. In tcode OBY6(Comp Code 

Global Parameters) of CC M100 we define normal COA i.e.,USCA in Chart of Accounts 

field and MXCA in Country Chart/Accts field. 

What are substitutions and validations? What is the precedent? 

Validations are used to check settings and return a message if the prerequisite check 

condition is met. 

Substitutions are similar to validations; they actually replace and fill in field values 

behind the scenes without the user‟s knowledge unlike validations that create onscreen 

msgs to the user. 

What is a controlling area? 

The Controlling Area is the central organizational unit within CO module. It is 

representative of a contained Cost Accounting envt where costs and revenues can be 

managed. 

Define relationship between controlling area and company code? 

A controlling area may include one or more company codes which must use the same 

operative chart of accounts as the controlling area. A Controlling Area can contain 

multiple company code assignments but a single company code can be assigned to 

only one controlling area. 

What is a fiscal year variant? 

Fiscal Year is a period of 12 months and SAP provides 4 special periods to posting 

adjustment Entries. Fiscal year determines posting periods. Posting periods are used 

to assign business transactions. Fiscal year may be year dependent or year 

independent. 

321

What are special periods used for? 

The Special periods in a fiscal year variant can be used for things like posting audit 

or tax adjustments to a closed fiscal year. 

What do you mean by year dependent in fiscal year variants? 

Year Dependent: the financial year is same as calendar year. Starting from 1st Jan to 

31st Dec (where posting periods and the calendar months are equal) 

Year Independent: the financial year is different from calendar year Starting from 1st 

April to 31st March (where the posting period months are not equal to calendar year 

months) 

What are shortened fiscal year? When are they used? 

Shortened Fiscal Year: a financial year, which has less than 12 periods. 

What are posting periods? 

The Posting period variant controls which posting periods, both normal and special, 

are open for each company code. It is possible to have a different posting period 

variant for each company code in the organization. The posting period is independent 

of the fiscal year variant. 

What are document types and what are they used for? 

Document type is the identifier of different account transactions like SA for G/L,AA 

for Asset Accounting etc.The doc. Types controls things like type of the account that 

can be posted to, the number range assigned to it, and required doc header fields. 

How are tolerance group for employees used? 

Tolerance group stores Posting amount defaults. Tolerance groups are assigned to 

User ID‟s that ensures only authorized persons can make postings. 

What are posting keys? State the purpose of defining posting keys? 

Posting keys determine whether a line item entry is a debit or a credit as well as the 

possible field status for the transaction. Posting keys are SAP delivered. If u want 

changes like making additional fields optional on payment type posting keys then the 

best possible action is to copy the posting key that needs to be modified and then 

modify it. 

What are field status groups? 

Field status groups control the additional account assignments and other fields that 

can be posted at the line item level for a G/L account. 

Questions and Answers for SAP Financial 

Q1-What are adjustment postings and its use? Give t.codes and paths if 

possible? 

Answer: fb50,f-02 and others could be used for adjustments. These adjustments are 

to correct any financial representation that has already been booked into the 

accounts. 

322

Q2-Suppose I have purchased goods of 10 units (raw materials or semifinished 

goods) worth Rs10000 from vendor A (suppose) and also made 

payment for the same. Now during the manufacturing process, it was 

observed that 3 units are defective, now my question is how do we deal 

with the defective units in SAP as I have already made payment for the 10 

units(i.e Rs10000). 

Answer: If you have a GRN against these materials, then the same can be return 

delivered. An appropriate movement type needs to be configured for the same. As 

for the payment, raise a credit note on the vendor. 

* Using Debit Memo you can get the money for defective 3 units. *-- Gnan Eswari 

Q.3-We always copy company code or we can create manually also? If 

possible give reasons also. 

Answer: There are loads of tables that get copied over when copying co codes. This 

might be incomplete in a manual copy, and hence the manual route is not advisable. 

Q.4-In case of APP, when bank master data updated? 

Q.5-Suppose in 2004 I have depreciation key 'AB&in 2005 depreciation key 

I have changed to"CD". In what way my balances would be affected like 

balances of depreciation, accumulated depreciation, assets etc. 

Answer: The difference in the depreciation that is posted already and what should be 

posted with historical effect will be posted in the current accounting period. 

Q.6 How many chart of accounts can be assigned to company code we can 

assign company code to chart of account through OB62? Now my question 

is in what way we can assign three types of chart of account to company 

code in one transaction code (I might be wrong plz correct me) 

Answer: Three, although the group and country chart of accounts are optional. The 

group chart of accounts is assigned to the operational chart of accounts, and the 

only mandatory Co is the Operational Co 

Q.7 How many financial statement versions can be assigned to co. code? 

Answer: As many FSVs as you want can be assigned to the co code i.e. 1:n as of Co 

Code: FSV. 

I have created Company Code and all other configuration related to the C 

Code. Also in MM I have created purchase order, created vendor, material 

etc. I couldn't activate the PO due to the following error messages in red: 

323

1. MAINTAIN TOLERANCE LIMITS FOR TOLERANCE KEY PE ACCOUNT 

ASSIGNMENT 

2. CONTROL INDICATORS FOR CONTROLLING AREA DO NOT EXIST. 

I have assigned controlling area to company code and I could see the 

controlling area in existence via master file and gl verification. 

1. MAINTAIN TOLERANCE LIMITS FOR TOLERANCE KEY PE ACCOUNT ASSIGNMENT - 

----> Please follow this link ---> SPRO ----> MM----> Purchasing ---> Purchase 

Order ---> Set Tolerance limits for price variance ---> Here you have to set for 

Tolerance keys PE and SE. Just copy them from std co. code. 

2. CONTROL INDICATORS FOR CONTROLLING AREA DO NOT EXIST. -----> 

In Controlling ---> General Controlling ---> Maintain Controlling Area ---> Maintain 

Controlling Area ---> Activate Components/Control Indicators ---> You need to 

check if you want to activate the order management/activity based 

costing/commitment management etc. 

SAP FI FAQ 

1. There is "company" field in the Company Code global settings. The R/3 

help says that it is being used for consolidation. We can use Group Chart of 

account to do the same. What is the significance of this field? 

2. When we copy the COA, only one Fin Stat Version is being copied. A COA 

can have many Fin Stat Version. Why copying of COA allows only one Fin St 

Ver? 

3. What are the information that are not copied to new company code 

when we copy company code? 

4. Whether one group chart of account can be assigned to 2 Operational 

charts. For Eg. INTA and INTB is being used by group of company as OCA. 

Whether GCA GRP can be assigned to INTA and INTB? 

1A). Company is an organizational unit which is generally used in the legal 

consolidation to roll up financial statements of several company codes. A company 

can include one or more company codes. If we are going for Consolidation , we need 

to enter the 6 character alphanumeric company identifier that relates to this 

company code. Company Codes within a Company must use the same chart of 

accounts and fiscal year. And for consolidation purpose we use Group COA wherein 

we link the Operating COA thru entering the GL account no. of the Group COA in the 

GL Account of the Operating COA. 

2A). A financial statement version corresponds to the chart of accounts and wherein 

Individual (operational) accounts are assigned to the corresponding FS item on the 

lowest level of this version. But as for the rollup of Accounts is not possible in all the 

FSV which can be copied, n rather can update manually n create multiple FSVs if 

324

necessary depending on the Financial Statements which are necessary for the 

Organization. 

3A). All the Organizational units (Global Data) for a company code will b copied to 

new company code upon using the copy function except for the transactional data. 

4A). Yes, Group COA can be assigned i.e., the GL A/c.No. is linked to the GL 

Accounts of the both Operating COA . That means Group COA consists of Unique set 

of Accounts which can be linked to Op.COA –1 and Op.COA –2. 

Ans: Q.No.1. In the SAP system, consolidation functions in financial accounting are 

based on companies. A company can comprise one or more company codes. for 

example: Company A have 4 company codes which is existing in different state and / 

or country. When Company A wants to consolidated the accounts, it will give the 

common list of accounts which in turn called group chart of accounts. Group chart of 

account is used to define/ list the GL account uniformly for all company codes. 

Ans: Q.No.2. In SAP R/3 system, will allow only one financial statement version for 

single COA which you need to assign the same while copying the COA. T.code OBY7 

Ans: Q.No.3. When you want to create FYV, PPV, COA etc for new company code 

which is as same as existing company code, then you can copy all the information 

from the source company code to the target company else whatever is required as 

per the new company code requirement you can only copy the same, rest you can 

create as per the requirement. for example Fiscal year for new company code may 

be shortened fiscal year which is differ from the existing company code. In this case, 

fiscal year for new company code you have to create and assign it to company code. 

Ans: Q.No.4. Operational chart of accounts is something differ from the Group chart 

of accounts but Group chart of account can be assigned to Operating chart of 

account 1 and 2 through GL account no. 

Operating chart of accounts: The operating chart of accounts contains the GL 

accounts that you use for posting in your company code during daily activities. 

Financial accounting and controlling both use this chart of accounts. You have to 

assign an operating chart of account to a company code. 

Group chart of accounts: The group chart of accounts contains the GL accounts that 

are used by the entire corporate group. This allows the company to provide reports 

for the entire corporate group 

How do I know which target cost version we are using? 

To find out which version is used for your Target Cost, try this menu path 

IMG > Controlling --> Product Cost Controlling --> Cost Object Controlling --> 

Product Cost by Order --> Period-end Closing --> Variance Calculation --> Define 

325

Target Cost Versions (tcode OKV6). 

How do you change the "Input tax code - Assets without input tax" value for 

a company in Asset Accounting? Technically, how do you change field 

MWSKZVA field in table T093C? TIA. 

You can used transaction 'OBCL'. 

Via customizing: Asset accounting --> Integration with general ledger --> Assign 

input tax indicator for non-taxable acquisitions 

Require GR & IV report 

Is there any report on GR pending for IV? 

You could try executing program RFWERE00, without postings. 

This is the same program which is used for period end closing- regrouping of 

GR/IR...but for only a report do not create postings. 

or 

May be transaction MB5S can help you out. 

Retained Profit Account 

After you run the GL balance carry forward, you only manage to know the 

balance carry forward for the retained profit account but you don't how 

much is actually post to the particular account. You have try almost all of 

the standard report but still can't find any report that can show you the 

figure. 

The balance carried forward is only a 'calculated' figure and not a 'posted' figure. The 

break-up of the retained earnings figure is available when you run the balance 

carried forward report. 

You can also derive the balance by selecting only the P&L Accounts for the relevant 

period. The net balance of these accounts should equal the retained earnings 

account. 

ACH payment configuration 

Based on 4.0B. Is it possible to configure the system for ACH payments or 

do we need to upgrade? 

You can use RFFOUS_T to produce an ACH file. You may have to use user exits to 

write header and trailer records. Please read documentation on this program and it is 

326

self-explanatory. 

Locking of Planning Data in Profit Center Accounting 

How to lock planning data in profit center accounting. 

In 4.6 b the transaction is S_ALR_87004395 - Maintain Versions you can lock 

versions for each fiscal year 

Changes in vendor master 

Is there a report which shows changes in vendor master data. 

Not only for one like MK04 or XK04 but for a range like all changes in 

vendors per c code. 

(should be similar to customer master transaction OV51) 

You can used report "RFKABL00". 

In the accounts payable reporting menu this program can be found via: 

Accounts payable --> Adequacy and documentation --> Master data --> Display of 

vendor changes 

(Depending on your SAP version of course) 

Bank Statement Upload 

How to use the program RFEBKATX? This creates two files STATE.TXT and 

ITEM.TXT. 

How are these files imported into SAP? 

Try using program RFEBKA00 to upload the two files. 

- one is the header file containing the House bank & account information along with 

the date and the statement number 

- the other is the item details 

Integration of FICO with Other Modules 

What are the steps for integration of FICO with other modules SD, MM etc.? 

Some basic information: 

FI-MM: The integration between FI-MM happens in T-code OBYC. 

1. When PO is created: 

327

---- No Entry ----- 

2. When GR is posted 

Inventory Account dr (Transaction Key BSX in OBYC) 

To GRIR account (T.Key WRX in T-code OBYC) 

3. When Invoice is posted 

GRIR account Dr. 

Vendor account Cr. 

4. Payment made to Vendor 

Vendor A/c Dr 

To Bank Clearing A/c Cr. 

Points to know : Movement Types, Assignment of Movement types to T-keys (T-code 

OMJJ), Value string (I also need some information on this) , OMWN and OMWB 

transactions. 

--- 

There is a close integration b/w FI & MM, actually document flows from MM to FI in 

the following areas such as, 

1. Movement Types: 

Used to enable the system to find the predefined posting rules determining how the 

accounts of financial accounting system are to be posted & to update the stock fields 

in the matrl master data.(Goods Receipt, Goods Issue, etc) 

2. Valuation Class: 

Assignment of material to grp of gl account, used to determine the gl accounts that 

are updated as a result of goods movement. 

3. Transaction/Event key: 

Used to control the storage or filing of documents & assignment of documents. Used 

to differentiate b/w various transactions such as goods movement that occur in 

inventory. 

4. Material Type: 

Each material should assign mtrl type in mtrl master record used to update whether 

changes made in qty are updated in material master record & change in value also 

updated in stock account. 

FI-SD Integration: The integration is done in T-code VKOA 

328

1. Sales Order Created 

---No Entry--- 

2. PGI done (Goods issue) 

Cost of Goods Sold Dr (Configured in OBYC GBB T-Key) 

To Inventory Account 

3. Billing document released to Accounting 

Customer Account Dr. 

To Sales Revenue Account (ERL T-key in Pricing procedure) 

Note : The GL account is assigned to this ERL in VKOA 

4. Payment Received 

Bank Clearing A/c Dr 

Customer A/c Cr. 

Points to Know : Good to understand the pricing procedure and how the different 

transaction keys are used like ERL, ERS etc. 

Entering Exchange Rate 

You used OB08 to enter the exchange rate ratio (from) and ration (to). 

There are three type of Exchange rate :- 

1. EURO Euro Dollar 

2. M Standard translation at average rate 

3. R Exchange rate for currency revaluation 

Some Important Tcodes for FI GL AR AP Asset 

T Codes Details 

Financial Accounting 

SPRO Enter IMG 

OX02 Company Code - Create, Check, Delete 

OX03 Create Business Area 

329

OKBD Functional Areas 

OB45 Create Credit Control Area 

OB29 Maintain Fiscal Year Variant 

OB37 Assign Co. Code to Fiscal Year Variant 

OB13 Creation of Chart of Account (CoA) 

OBY7 Copy Chart of Account (CoA) 

OBY9 Transport Chart of Account 

OBD4 Define Account Group 

OBY2 Copy GL Accounts from the Chart to Co. Code 

OB53 Define Retained Earnings 

OB58 Maintain Financial Statement Versions 

OBC4 Maintain Field Status Variant 

OBBO Define Posting Period Variant 

OBA7 Define Document Type & Number Ranges 

OB41 Maintain Posting Keys 

OBA4 Create Tolerance Groups 

FBN1 Create GL Number Ranges 

OBL1 Automatic Posting Documentation 

FBKP Automatic Account Assignment 

OBYC MM Automatic Account Assignment 

OBY6 Enter Global Parameters 

FS00 Creation of GL Master Records 

(F-02) Posting of GL Transactions 

(FB03) Display of GL Document 

330

(FS10N) Display of GL Accounts 

OB46 Define Interest Calculation Types 

OBD3 Define Vendor Account Group 

(XK01) Creation of Vendor Master 

(F-43) Purchase Invoice Posting 

(FK10N) Display Vendor Account 

F112 Define House Bank 

OBB8 Maintain Terms of Payment (ToP) 

OBD2 Creation of Customer Account Group 

OBA3 Customer Tolerance Groups 

(XD01) Creation of Customer Master 

(FD10N) Display Customer Account 

(F-28) Incoming Payment Posting 

OB61 Define Dunning Area 

EC08 Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation (CoD) 

OADB Define Depreciation Area 

OAOB Assign Chart of Depreciation to Co. Code 

OAOA Define Asset Class 

AO90 Assignment of Account in Asset Class 

OAY2 Determination of Depreciation Area in Asset Class 

(AS01) Creation of Asset Master 

(AS11) Creation of Sub Asset 

(F-90) Asset Purchase Posting 

(AFAB) Depreciation Run 

331

(F-92) Asset Sale Posting 

(AW01N) Asset Explorer 

SAP FI Transaction Code List 1 

How to reverse cleared documents? 

The following procedure is to be followed to reverse the cleared document. 

1. Reset the cleared document and reverse the document. 

Path # Accounting ---> financial Accounting ---> C/L ---> Document---> Reset 

Cleared items - T. code : FBRA 

In this screen select resetting and reverse radio button and give the reversal 

reason. : 01 and save the settings. 

F-01 Enter Sample Document 

F-02 Enter G/L Account Posting 

F-03 Clear G/L Account 

F-04 Post with Clearing 

F-05 Post Foreign Currency Valuation 

F-06 Post Incoming Payments 

F-07 Post Outgoing Payments 

F-18 Payment with Printout 

F-19 Reverse Statistical Posting 

F-20 Reverse Bill Liability 

F-21 Enter Transfer Posting 

F-22 Enter Customer Invoice 

F-23 Return Bill of Exchange Pmt Request 

F-25 Reverse Check/Bill of Exch. 

F-26 Incoming Payments Fast Entry 

F-27 Enter Customer Credit Memo 

332


F-29 Post Customer Down Payment 



F-32 Clear Customer 

F-33 Post Bill of Exchange Usage 

F-34 Post Collection 

F-35 Post Forfaiting 

F-36 Bill of Exchange Payment 

F-37 Customer Down Payment Request 

F-38 Enter Statistical Posting 

F-39 Clear Customer Down Payment 

F-40 Bill of Exchange Payment 

F-41 Enter Vendor Credit Memo 

F-42 Enter Transfer Posting 

F-43 Enter Vendor Invoice 

F-44 Clear Vendor 

F-46 Reverse Refinancing Acceptance 

F-47 Down Payment Request 

F-48 Post Vendor Down Payment 

F-49 Customer Noted Item 




333

F-54 Clear Vendor Down Payment 

F-55 Enter Statistical Posting 

F-56 Reverse Statistical Posting 

F-57 Vendor Noted Item 

F-58 Payment with Printout 

F-59 Payment Request 

F-60 Maintain Table: Posting Periods 

F-62 Maintain Table: Exchange Rates 

F-63 Park Vendor Invoice 

F-64 Park Customer Invoice 

F-65 Preliminary Posting 

F-66 Park Vendor Credit Memo 

F-67 Park Customer Credit Memo 

F-90 Acquisition from purchase w. vendor 

F-91 Asset acquis. to clearing account 

F-92 Asset Retire. frm Sale w/ Customer 

F.01 ABAP/4 Report: Balance Sheet 

F.02 Compact Journal 

F.03 Reconciliation 

F.04 G/L: Create Foreign Trade Report 

F.05 Foreign Currency Val.: Open Items 

F.06 Foreign Currency Valuation:G/L Assts 

F.07 G/L: Balance Carried Forward 

F.08 G/L: Account Balances 

334

F.09 G/L: Account List 

F.0A G/L: FTR Report on Disk 

F.0B G/L: Create Z2 to Z4 

F.10 G/L: Chart of Accounts 

F.11 G/L: General Ledger from Doc.File 

F.12 Advance Tax Return 

F.13 ABAP/4 Report: Automatic Clearing 

F.14 ABAP/4 Report: Recurring Entries 

F.15 ABAP/4 Report: List Recurr.Entries 

F.16 ABAP/4 Report: G/L Bal.Carried Fwd 

F.17 ABAP/4 Report: Cust.Bal.Confirmation 

F.18 ABAP/4 Report: Vend.Bal.Confirmation 

F.19 G/L: Goods/Invoice Received Clearing 

F.1A Customer/Vendor Statistics 

F.1B Head Office and Branch Index 

F.20 A/R: Account List 

F.21 A/R: Open Items 

F.22 A/R: Open Item Sorted List 

F.23 A/R: Account Balances 

F.24 A/R: Interest for Days Overdue 

F.25 Bill of Exchange List 

F.26 A/R: Balance Interest Calculation 

F.27 A/R: Periodic Account Statements 

F.28 Customers: Reset Credit Limit 

335

F.29 A/R: Set Up Info System 1 

F.2A Calc.cust.int.on arr.: Post (w/o OI) 

F.2B Calc.cust.int.on arr.: Post(with OI) 

F.2C Calc.cust.int.on arr.: w/o postings 

F.2D Customrs: FI-SD mast.data comparison 

F.2E Reconciliation Btwn Affiliated Comps 

F.2F Management Acct Group Reconciliation 

F.2G Create Account Group Reconcil. G/L 

F.30 A/R: Evaluate Info System 

F.31 Credit Management - Overview 

F.32 Credit Management - Missing Data 

F.33 Credit Management - Brief Overview 

F.34 Credit Management - Mass Change 

F.35 Credit Master Sheet 

F.36 Adv.Ret.on Sls/Pur.Form Printout(DE) 

F.37 Adv.rept.tx sls/purch.form print (BE 

F.38 Transfer Posting of Deferred Tax 

F.39 C FI Maint. table T042Z (BillExcTyp) 

F.40 A/P: Account List 

F.41 A/P: Open Items 

F.42 A/P: Account Balances 

F.44 A/P: Balance Interest Calculation 

F.45 A/P: Set Up Info System 1 

F.46 A/P: Evaluate Info System 

336

F.47 Vendors: calc.of interest on arrears 

F.48 Vendors: FI-MM mast.data comparison 

F.4A Calc.vend.int.on arr.: Post (w/o OI) 

F.4B Calc.vend.int.on arr.: Post(with OI) 

F.4C Calc.vend.int.on arr.: w/o postings 

F.50 G/L: Profitability Segment Adjustmnt 

F.51 G/L: Open Items 

F.52 G/L: Acct Bal.Interest Calculation 

F.53 G/L: Account Assignment Manual 

F.54 G/L: Structured Account Balances 

F.56 Delete Recurring Document 

F.57 G/L: Delete Sample Documents 

F.58 OI Bal.Audit Trail: fr.Document File 

F.59 Accum.Clas.Aud.Trail: Create Extract 

F.5A Accum.Clas.Aud.Trail: Eval.Extract 

F.5B Accum.OI Aud.Trail: Create Extract 

F.5C Accum.OI Audit Trail: Display Extr. 

F.5D G/L: Update Bal. Sheet Adjustment 

F.5E G/L: Post Balance Sheet Adjustment 

F.5F G/L: Balance Sheet Adjustment Log 

F.5G G/L: Subseq.Adjustment(BA/PC) Sp.ErA 

F.5I G/L: Adv.Rep.f.Tx on Sls/Purch.w.Jur 

F.61 Correspondence: Print Requests 

F.62 Correspondence: Print Int.Documents 

337

F.63 Correspondence: Delete Requests 

F.64 Correspondence: Maintain Requests 

F.65 Correspondence: Print Letters (Cust) 

F.66 Correspondence: Print Letters (Vend) 

F.70 Bill/Exchange Pmnt Request Dunning 

F.71 DME with Disk: B/Excha. Presentation 

F.75 Extended Bill/Exchange Information 

F.77 C FI Maintain Table T045D 

F.78 C FI Maintain Table T045B 

F.79 C FI Maintain Table T045G 

F.80 Mass Reversal of Documents 

F.81 Reverse Posting for Accr./Defer.Docs 

F.90 C FI Maintain Table T045F 

F.91 C FI Maintain Table T045L 

F.92 C FI Maintain T012K (Bill/Exch.) 

F.93 Maintain Bill Liability and Rem.Risk 

F.97 General Ledger: Report Selection 

F.98 Vendors: Report Selection 

F.99 Customers: Report Selection 

F/LA Create Pricing Report 

F/LB Change pricing reports 

F/LC Display pricing reports 

F/LD Execute pricing reports 

F00 SAPoffice: Short Message 

338

F000 Accounting 

F010 ABAP/4 Reporting: Fiscal Year Change 

F01N Debit position RA single reversal 

F01O Vacancy RU single reversal 

F01P Accruals/deferrals single reversal 

F01Q Debit position MC single reversal 

F01R MC settlement single reversal 

F01S Reverse Periodic Posting 

F01T Reverse Acc./Def. General Contract 

F040 Reorganization 

F041 Bank Master Data Archiving 

F042 G/L Accounts Archiving 

F043 Customer Archiving 

F044 Vendor Archiving 

F045 Document Archiving 

F046 Transaction Figures Archiving 

F101 ABAP/4 Reporting: Balance Sheet Adj. 

F103 ABAP/4 Reporting: Transfer Receivbls 

F104 ABAP/4 Reporting: Receivbls Provisn 

F107 FI Valuation Run 

F110 Parameters for Automatic Payment 

F111 Parameters for Payment of PRequest 

F13E ABAP/4 Report: Automatic Clearing 

F150 Dunning Run 

339

F48A Document Archiving 

F53A Archiving of G/L Accounts 

F53V Management of G/L Account Archives 

F56A Customer Archiving 

F58A Archiving of Vendors 

F61A Bank archiving 

F64A Transaction Figure Archiving 

F66A Archiving of Bank Data Storage 

F8+0 Display FI Main Role Definition 

F8+1 Maintain FI Main Role Definition 

F8+2 Display FI Amount Groups 

F8+3 Maintain FI Amount Groups 

F8B4 C FI Maintain Table TBKDC 

F8B6N C FI Maintain Table TBKPV 

F8BC C FI Maintain Table TBKFK 

F8BF C FI Maintain Table T042Y 

F8BG Maintain Global Data for F111 

F8BH Inconsistencies T042I and T042Y 

F8BJ Maintain Clearing Accts (Rec.Bank) 

F8BK Maintain ALE-Compatible Pmnt Methods 

F8BM Maintain numb.range: Payment request 

F8BN Corr.Acctg Documents Payment Block 

F8BO Payment request archiving 

F8BR Levels for Payment Requests 

340

F8BS Detail display of payment requests 

F8BT Display Payment Requests 

F8BU Create payment runs automatically 

F8BV Reversal of Bank-to-Bank Transfers 

F8BW Reset Cleared Items: Payt Requests 

F8BZ F111 Customizing 

F8XX Payment Request No. Ranges KI3-F8BM 

FA39 Call up report with report variant 

FAKA Config.: Show Display Format 

FAKP Config.: Maintain Display Format 

FAR1 S FI-ARI Maint. table T061A 

FARA S FI-ARI Maint. table T061P/Q 

FARB C FI-ARI Maint. table T061R 

FARI AR Interface: Third-party applicatns 

FARY Table T061S 

FARZ Table T061V 

FAX1 BC sample SAP DE 2.1 

FAX2 BC sample 2 SAP DE 2.1 

FB00 Accounting Editing Options 

FB01 Post Document 

FB02 Change Document 

FB03 Display Document 

FB03Z Display Document/Payment Usage 

FB04 Document Changes 

341

FB05 Post with Clearing 

FB05_OLD Post with clearing 

FB07 Control Totals 

FB08 Reverse Document 

FB09 Change Line Items 

FB10 Invoice/Credit Fast Entry 

FB11 Post Held Document 

FB12 Request from Correspondence 

FB13 Release for Payments 

FB1D Clear Customer 

FB1K Clear Vendor 

FB1S Clear G/L Account 

FB21 Enter Statistical Posting 

FB22 Reverse Statistical Posting 

FB31 Enter Noted Item 

FB41 Post Tax Payable 

FB50 G/L Acct Pstg: Single Screen Trans. 

FB60 Enter Incoming Invoices 

FB65 Enter Incoming Credit Memos 

FB70 Enter Outgoing Invoices 

FB75 Enter Outgoing Credit Memos 

FB99 Check if Documents can be Archived 

FBA1 Customer Down Payment Request 

FBA2 Post Customer Down Payment 

342

FBA3 Clear Customer Down Payment 

FBA6 Vendor Down Payment Request 

FBA7 Post Vendor Down Payment 

FBA7_OLD Post Vendor Down Payment 

FBA8 Clear Vendor Down Payment 

FBA8_OLD Clear Vendor Down Payment 

FBB1 Post Foreign Currency Valn 

FBBA Display Acct Determination Config. 

FBBP Maintain Acct Determination Config. 

FBCJ Cash Journal 

FBCJC0 C FI Maintain Tables TCJ_C_JOURNALS 

FBCJC1 Cash Journal Document Number Range 

FBCJC2 C FI Maint. Tables TCJ_TRANSACTIONS 

FBCJC3 C FI Maintain Tables TCJ_PRINT 

FBCOPY Copy Function Module 

FBD1 Enter Recurring Entry 

FBD2 Change Recurring Entry 

FBD3 Display Recurring Entry 

FBD4 Display Recurring Entry Changes 

FBD5 Realize Recurring Entry 

FBD9 Enter Recurring Entry 

FBDF Menu Banque de France 

FBE1 Create Payment Advice 

FBE2 Change Payment Advice 

343

FBE3 Display Payment Advice 

FBE6 Delete Payment Advice 

FBE7 Add to Payment Advice Account 

FBF1 C80 Reporting Minus Sp.G/L Ind. 

FBF2 Financial Transactions 

FBF3 Control Report 

FBF4 Download Documents 

FBF5 Reports Minus Vendor Accounts 

FBF6 Document Changes 

FBF7 C80 Reports Minus Sp.G/L Ind. 

FBF8 C84 Reports 

FBFT Customizing BDF 

FBIPU Maintain bank chains for partner 

FBKA Display Accounting Configuration 

FBKF FBKP/Carry Out Function (Internal) 

FBKP Maintain Accounting Configuration 

FBL1 Display Vendor Line Items 

FBL1N Vendor Line Items 

FBL2 Change Vendor Line Items 

FBL2N Vendor Line Items 

FBL3 Display G/L Account Line Items 

FBL3N G/L Account Line Items 

FBL4 Change G/L Account Line Items 

FBL4N G/L Account Line Items 

344

FBL5 Display Customer Line Items 

FBL5N Customer Line Items 

FBL6 Change Customer Line Items 

FBL6N Customer Line Items 

FBM1 Enter Sample Document 

FBM2 Change Sample Document 

FBM3 Display Sample Document 

FBM4 Display Sample Document Changes 

FBMA Display Dunning Procedure 

FBME Banks 

FBMP Maintain Dunning Procedure 

FBN1 Accounting Document Number Ranges 

FBN2 Number Range Maintenance: FI_PYORD 

FBP1 Enter Payment Request 

FBR1 Post with Reference Document 

FBR2 Post Document 

FBRA Reset Cleared Items 

FBRC Reset Cleared Items (Payment Cards) 

FBS1 Enter Accrual/Deferral Doc. 

FBTA Display Text Determin.Configuration 

FBTP Maintain Text Determin.Configuration 

FBU2 Change Intercompany Document 

FBU3 Display Intercompany Document 

FBU8 Reverse Cross-Company Code Document 

345

FBV0 Post Parked Document 

FBV1 Park Document 

FBV2 Change Parked Document 

FBV3 Display Parked Document 

FBV4 Change Parked Document (Header) 

FBV5 Document Changes of Parked Documents 

FBV6 Parked Document $ 

FBVB Post Parked Document 

FBW1 Enter Bill of Exchange Pmnt Request 

FBW2 Post Bill of Exch.acc.to Pmt Request 

FBW3 Post Bill of Exchange Usage 

FBW4 Reverse Bill Liability 

FBW5 Customer Check/Bill of Exchange 

FBW6 Vendor Check/Bill of Exchange 

FBW7 Bank file to file system (for FBWD) 

FBW8 File to Bank (for Transaction FBWD) 

FBW9 C FI Maintain Table T045DTA 

FBWA C FI Maintain Table T046a 

FBWD Returned Bills of Exchange Payable 

FBWD2 Parameter Transaction for FBWD 

FBWE Bill/Exch.Presentatn - International 

FBWQ C FI Maintain Table T045T 

FBWR C FI Maintain Table T045W 

FBWS C FI Maintain Table T046s 

346

FBZ0 Display/Edit Payment Proposal 

FBZ1 Post Incoming Payments 

FBZ2 Post Outgoing Payments 

FBZ3 Incoming Payments Fast Entry 

FBZ4 Payment with Printout 

FBZ5 Print Check For Payment Document 

FBZ8 Display Payment Run 

FBZA Display Pmnt Program Configuration 

FBZG Failed Customer Payments 

FBZP Maintain Pmnt Program Configuration 

FC10 Financial Statements Comparison 

FC11 Data Extract for FI Transfer 

FC80 Document C80 

FC82 Document C82 

FCAA Check Archiving 

FCC1 Payment Cards: Settlement 

FCC2 Payment Cards: Repeat Settlement 

FCC3 Payment Cards: Delete Logs 

FCC4 Payment Cards: Display Logs 

FCCR Payment Card Evaluations 

FCH1 Display Check Information 

FCH2 Display Payment Document Checks 

FCH3 Void Checks 

FCH4 Renumber Checks 

347

FCH5 Create Check Information 

FCH6 Change Check Information/Cash Check 

FCH7 Reprint Check 

FCH8 Reverse Check Payment 

FCH9 Void Issued Check 

FCHA Check archiving 

FCHB Check retrieval 

FCHD Delete Payment Run Check Information 

FCHE Delete Voided Checks 

FCHF Delete Manual Checks 

FCHG Delete cashing/extract data 

FCHI Check Lots 

FCHK Check Tracing Initial Menu 

FCHN Check Register 

FCHR Online Cashed Checks 

FCHT Change check/payment allocation 

FCHU Create Reference for Check 

FCHV C FI Maintain Table TVOID 

FCHX Check Extract - Creation 

FCIWCU BW Customizing for CS 

FCIWD00 Download InfoObject text 

FCIWD10 Download InfoObject hierarchies 

FCKR International cashed checks 

FCMM C FI Preparations for consolidation 

348

FCMN FI Initial Consolidation Menu 

FCV1 Create A/R Summary 

FCV2 Delete A/R Summary 

FCV3 Early Warning List 

FC_BW_BEX Business Explorer Analyser 

FC_BW_RSA1 BW Administrator Workbench 

FC_BW_RSZDELETE Delete BW Query Objects 

FC_BW_RSZV Maintain BW Variables 

FD-1 Number range maintenance: FVVD_RANL 

FD01 Create Customer (Accounting) 

FD02 Change Customer (Accounting) 

FD02CORE Maintain customer 

FD03 Display Customer (Accounting) 

FD04 Customer Changes (Accounting) 

FD05 Block Customer (Accounting) 

FD06 Mark Customer for Deletion (Acctng) 

FD08 Confirm Customer Individually(Actng) 

FD09 Confirm Customer List (Accounting) 

FD10 Customer Account Balance 

FD10N Customer Balance Display 

FD10NA Customer Bal. Display with Worklist 

FD11 Customer Account Analysis 

FD15 Transfer customer changes: send 

FD16 Transfer customer changes: receive 

349

FD24 Credit Limit Changes 

FD32 Change Customer Credit Management 

FD33 Display Customer Credit Management 

FD37 Credit Management Mass Change 

FDCU Loans customizing menu 

FDFD Cash Management Implementation Tool 

FDI0 Execute Report 

FDI1 Create Report 

FDI2 Change Report 

FDI3 Display Report 

FDI4 Create Form 

FDI5 Change Form 

FDI6 Display Form 

FDIB Background Processing 

FDIC Maintain Currency Translation Type 

FDIK Maintain Key Figures 

FDIM Report Monitor 

FDIO Transport Reports 

FDIP Transport Forms 

FDIQ Import Reports from Client 000 

FDIR Import Forms from Client 000 

FDIT Translation Tool - Drilldown Report 

FDIV Maintain Global Variable 

FDIX Reorganize Drilldown Reports 

350

FDIY Reorganize Report Data 

FDIZ Reorganize Forms 

FDK43 Credit Management - Master Data List 

FDMN 

FDOO Borrower's notes order overview 

FDTA TemSe/REGUT Data Administration 

FDTT Treasury Data Medium Administration 

FEBA Postprocess Electronic Bank Statmt 

FEBC Generate Multicash format 

FEBMSG Display Internet Messages 

FEBOAS Request Account Statement via OFX 

FEBOFX OFX Functions 

FEBP Post Electronic Bank Statement 

FEBSTS Search String Search Simulation 

FESR Importing of POR File (Switzerland) 

FEUB Adjust VIBEPP after EURO conversion 

FEUI Real Estate Implementation Guide 

FF$3 Send planning data to central system 

FF$4 Retrieve planning data 

FF$5 Retrieve transmission results 

FF$6 Check settings 

FF$7 Check all external systems 

FF$A Maintain TR-CM subsystems 

FF$B Convert Planning Group 

351

FF$C Convert planning level 

FF$D Convert business areas 

FF$L Display transmission information 

FF$S Display transmission information 

FF$X Configure the central TR-CM system 

FF-1 Outstanding Checks 

FF-2 Outstanding Bills of Exchange 

FF-3 Cash Management Summary Records 

FF-4 CMF Data In Accounting Documents 

FF-5 CMF Records fr.Materials Management 

FF-6 CMF Records from Sales 

FF-7 Forecast Item Journal 

FF-8 Payment Advice Journal 

FF-9 Journal 

FF.1 Standard G/L Account Interest Scale 

FF.3 G/L Account Cashed Checks 

FF.4 Vendor Cashed Checks 

FF.5 Import Electronic Bank Statement 

FF.6 Display Electronic Bank Statement 

FF.7 Payment Advice Comparison 

FF.8 Print Payment Orders 

FF.9 Post Payment Orders 

FF.D Generate payt req. from advices 

FF/1 Compare Bank Terms 

352

FF/2 Compare value date 

FF/3 Archive advices from bank statements 

FF/4 Import electronic check deposit list 

FF/5 Post electronic check deposit list 

FF/6 Deposit/loan mgmt analysis/posting 

FF/7 Deposit/loan management int accruals 

FF/8 Import Bank Statement into Cash Mgmt 

FF/9 Compare Advices with Bank Statement 

FF63 Create Planning Memo Record 

FF65 List of Cash Management Memo Records 

FF67 Manual Bank Statement 

FF68 Manual Check Deposit Transaction 

FF6A Edit Cash Mgmt Pos Payment Advices 

FF6B Edit liquidity forecast planned item 

FF70 Cash Mgmt Posit./Liquidity Forecast 

FF71 Cash Position 

FF72 Liquidity forecast 

FF73 Cash Concentration 

FF74 Use Program to Access Cash Concntn 

FF7A Cash Position 

FF7B Liquidity forecast 

FF:1 Maintain exchange rates 

FFB4 Import electronic check deposit list 

FFB5 Post electronic check deposit list 

353

FFL_OLD Display Transmission Information 

FFS_OLD Display Transmission Information 

FFTL Telephone list 

FFW1 Wire Authorization 

FFWR Post Payment Requests from Advice 

FFWR_REQUESTS Create Payment Requests from Advice 

FF_1 Standard G/L Account Interest Scale 

FF_3 G/L Account Cashed Checks 

FF_4 Vendor Cashed Checks 

FF_5 Import Electronic Bank Statement 

FF_6 Display Electronic Bank Statement 

SAP FI Transaction Code List 2 

FG99 Flexible G/L: Report Selection 

FGI0 Execute Report 

FGI1 Create Report 

FGI2 Change Report 

FGI3 Display Report 

FGI4 Create Form 

FGI5 Change Form 

FGI6 Display Form 

FGIB Background Processing 

FGIC Maintain Currency Translation Type 

FGIK Maintain Key Figures 

FGIM Report Monitor 

354

FGIO Transport Reports 

FGIP Transport Forms 

FGIQ Import Reports from Client 000 

FGIR Import Forms from Client 000 

FGIT Translation Tool - Drilldown Report. 

FGIV Maintain Global Variable 

FGIX Reorganize Drilldown Reports 

FGIY Reorganize Report Data 

FGIZ Reorganize Forms 

FGM0 Special Purpose Ledger Menu 

FGRP Report Painter 

FGRW Report Writer Menu 

FI01 Create Bank 

FI02 Change Bank 

FI03 Display Bank 

FI04 Display Bank Changes 

FI06 Mark Bank for Deletion 

FI07 Change Current Number Range Number 

FI12 Change House Banks/Bank Accounts 

FI12CORE Change House Banks/Bank Accounts 

FI13 Display House Banks/Bank Accounts 

FIBB Bank chain determination 

FIBC Scenarios for Bank Chain Determine. 

FIBD Allocation client 

355

FIBF Maintenance transaction BTE 

FIBHS Display bank chains for house banks 

FIBHU Maintain bank chains for house banks 

FIBL1 Control Origin Indicator 

FIBL2 Assign Origin 

FIBL3 Group of House Bank Accounts 

FIBPS Display bank chians for partners 

FIBPU Maintain bank chains for partner 

FIBTS Dis. bank chains for acct carry over 

FIBTU Main. Bank chains for acctCarry over 

FIHC Create In house Cash Center 

FILAUF_WF_CUST Store Order: Workflow Customizing 

FILE Cross-Client File Names/Paths 

FILINV_WF_CUST Store Inventory: Workflow Customizing 

FINA Branch to Financial Accounting 

FINF Info System Events 

FINP Info System Processes 

FITP_RESPO Contact Partner Responsibilities 

FITP_SETTINGS Settings for Travel Planning 

FITP_SETTINGS_TREE Tree Maintenance Current Settings 

FITVFELD Tree 

FJA1 Inflation Adjustment of G/L Accounts 

FJA2 Reset Transaction Data G/L Acc.Infl. 

FJA3 Balance Sheet/P&L with Inflation 

356

FJA4 Infl. Adjustment of Open Items (FC) 

FJA5 Infl. Adj. of Open Receivables (LC) 

FJA6 Infl. Adj. of Open Payables (LC) 

FJEE Exercise Subscription Right 

FK01 Create Vendor (Accounting) 

FK02 Change Vendor (Accounting) 

FK02CORE Maintain vendor 

FK03 Display Vendor (Accounting) 

FK04 Vendor Changes (Accounting) 

FK05 Block Vendor (Accounting) 

FK06 Mark Vendor for Deletion (Acctng) 

FK08 Confirm Vendor Individually (Acctng) 

FK09 Confirm Vendor List (Accounting) 

FK10 Vendor Account Balance 

FK10N Vendor Balance Display 

FK10NA Vendor Balance Display 

FK15 Transfer vendor changes: receive 

FK16 Transfer vendor changes: receive 

FKI0 Execute Report 

FKI1 Create Report 

FKI2 Change Report 

FKI3 Display Report 

FKI4 Create Form 

FKI5 Change Form 

357

FKI6 Display Form 

FKIB Background Processing 

FKIC Maintain Currency Translation Type 

FKIK Maintain Key Figures 

FKIM Report Monitor 

FKIO Transport Reports 

FKIP Transport Forms 

FKIQ Import Reports from Client 000 

FKIR Import Forms from Client 000 

FKIT Translation Tool - Drilldown Report. 

FKIV Maintain Global Variable 

FKIX Reorganize Drilldown Reports 

FKIY Reorganize Report Data 

FKIZ Reorganize Forms 

FKMN 

FKMT FI Acct Assignment Model Management 

FLB1 Post processing Lockbox Data 

FLB2 Import Lockbox File 

FLBP Post Lockbox Data 

FLCV Create/Edit Document Template WF 

FM+0 Display FM Main Role Definition 

FM+1 Maintain FM Main Role Definition 

FM+2 Display FM Amount Groups 

FM+3 Maintain FM Amount Groups 

358

FM+4 Display FM Budget Line Groups 

FM+5 Maintain FM Budget Line Groups 

FM+6 Display FM Document Classes 

FM+7 Maintain FM Document Classes 

FM+8 Display FM Activity Categories 

FM+9 Maintain FM Activity Categories 

FM+A Display Doc.Class-->Doc.Cat. Assgmt 

FM+B Maintain Doc.Clase-->Doc.Cat.Assgmt 

FM03 Display FM Document 

FM21 Change Original Budget 

FM22 Display Original Budget 

FM25 Change Supplement 

FM26 Display Supplement 

FM27 Change Return 

FM28 Transfer Budget 

FM29 Display Return 

FM2D Display Funds Center Hierarchy 

FM2E Change Budget Document 

FM2F Display Budget Document 

FM2G Funds Center Hierarchy 

FM2H Maintain Funds Center Hierarchy 

FM2I Create Funds Center 

FM2S Display Funds Center 

FM2T Change Releases 

359

FM2U Change Funds Center 

FM2V Display Releases 

FM3D Display Commitment Item Hierarchy 

FM3G Commitment Item Hierarchy 

FM3H Maintain Commitment Item Hierarchy 

FM3I Create Commitment Item 

FM3N Commitment Items for G/L Accounts 

FM3S Display Commitment Item 

FM3U Change Commitment Item 

FM48 Change Financial Budget: Initial Scn 

FM48_1 PS-CM: Create Planning Layout 

FM48_2 PS-CM: Change Planning Layout 

FM48_3 PS-CM: Display Planning Layout 

FM49 Display Financial Budget: Init.Scrn 

FM4G Budget Structure Element Hierarchy 

FM5I Create Fund 

FM5S Display Fund 

FM5U Change Fund 

FM5_DEL Delete fund preselection 

FM5_DISP Display fund preselection 

FM5_SEL Preselection Fund 

FM6I Create Application of Funds 

FM6S Display Application of Funds 

FM6U Change Application of Funds 

360

FM71 Maintain Cover Pools 

FM72 Assign FM Acct Asst to Cover Pool 

FM78 Charact.Groups for Cover Pools 

FM79 Grouping Chars for Cover Pool 

FM7A Display Cover Eligibility Rules 

FM7I Create Attributes for FM Acct Asst 

FM7P Maintain Cover Eligibility Rules 

FM7S Display Cover Eligibility Rules 

FM7U Maintain Cover Eligibility Rules 

FM9B Copy Budget Version 

FM9C Plan Data Transfer from CO 

FM9D Lock Budget Version 

FM9E Unlock Budget Version 

FM9F Delete Budget Version 

FM9G Roll Up Supplement 

FM9H Roll up Original Budget 

FM9I Roll Up Return 

FM9J Roll Up Releases 

FM9K Change Budget Structure 

FM9L Display Budget Structure 

FM9M Delete Budget Structure 

FM9N Generate Budget Object 

FM9P Reconstruct Budget Distrbtd Values 

FM9Q Total Up Budget 

361

FM9W Adjust Funds Management Budget 

FMA1 Matching: Totals and Balances (CBM) 

FMA2 Matching: CBM Line Items and Totals 

FMA3 Matching: FI Line Items (CBM) 

FMA4 Matching: FI Bank Line Items (CBM) 

FMAA Matching: Line Items and Totals (FM) 

FMAB Matching: FI FM Line Items 

FMAC Leveling: FM Commitment Line Items 

FMAD Leveling: FI-FM Totals Records 

FMAE Display Change Documents 

FMAF Level Line Items and Totals Items 

FMB0 CO Document Transfer 

FMB1 Display Security Prices-Collect. 

FMBI Use Revenues to Increase Expend.Bdgt 

FMBUD005 FIFM Budget Data Export 

FMBUD006 FIFM Budget Data Import 

FMBV Activate Availability Control 

FMC2 Customizing in Day-to-Day Business 

FMCB Reassignment: Document Selection 

FMCC Reassignment: FM-CO Assignment 

FMCD Reassignment: Delete Work List 

FMCG Reassignment: Overall Assignment 

FMCN Reassignment: Supplement.Acct Assgt 

FMCR Reassignment: Display Work List 

362

FMCT Reassignment: Transfer 

FMD1 Change Carry forward Rules 

FMD2 Display Carry forward Rules 

FMDM Monitor Closing Operations 

FMDS Copy Carry forward Rules 

FMDT Display Carry forward Rules 

FME1 Import Forms from Client 000 

FME2 Import Reports from Client 000 

FME3 Transport Forms 

FME4 Transport Reports 

FME5 Reorganize Forms 

FME6 Reorganize Drilldown Reports 

FME7 Reorganize Report Data 

FME8 Maintain Batch Variants 

FME9 Translation Tool - Drilldown 

FMEB Structure Report Backgrnd Processing 

FMEH SAP-EIS: Hierarchy Maintenance 

FMEK FMCA: Create Drilldown Report 

FMEL FMCA: Change Drilldown Report 

FMEM FMCA: Display Drilldown Report 

FMEN FMCA: Create Form 

FMEO FMCA: Change Form 

FMEP FMCA: Display Form 

FMEQ FMCA: Run Drilldown Report 

363

FMER FMCA: Drilldown Tool Test Monitor 

FMEURO1 Create Euro FM Area 

FMEURO2 Refresh Euro Master Data 

FMEURO3 Display Euro FM Areas 

FMEURO4 Deactivate Euro FM Areas 

FMEV Maintain Global Variable 

FMF0 Payment Selection 

FMF1 Revenue Transfer 

FMG1 FM: Create Commitment Item Group 

FMG2 FM: Change Commit ment Item Group 

FMG3 FM: Display Commitment Item Group 

FMG4 FM: Delete Commitment Item Group 

FMG5 Generate BS Objects fr.Cmmt Item Grp 

FMHC Check Budget Structure Elements in HR 

FMHG Generate Budget Struc Elements in HR 

FMHGG Generate BS Elements f. Several Funds 

FMHH Master Data Check 

FMHIST Apportion Document in FM 

FMHV Budget Memo Texts 

FMIA Display Rules for Revs.Incr.Budget 

FMIB Increase Budget by Revenues 

FMIC Generate Additional Budget Incr.Data 

FMIL Delete Rules for Revs Incr. Budget 

FMIP Maintain Rules for Revs.Incr.Budget 

364

FMIS Display Rules for Revs.Incr.Budget 

FMIU Maintain Rules for Revs.Incr.Budget 

FMJ1 Fiscal Year Close: Select Commitment 

FMJ1_TR Settlement: Select Commitment 

FMJ2 Fiscal Year Close: Carr.Fwd Commts 

FMJ2_TR Settlement: Transfer Commitment 

FMJ3 Reverse Commitments Carry forward 

FMJA Budget Fiscal Year Close: Prepare 

FMJA_TR Budget Settlement: Prepare 

FMJB Determine Budget Year-End Closing 

FMJB_TR Budget Settlement: Determine 

FMJC Budget Fiscal-Year Close: Carry Fwd 

FMJC_TR Budget Settlement: Transfer 

FMJD Reverse Fiscal Year Close: Budget 

FMLD Ledger Deletion 

FMLF Classify Movement Types 

FMN0 Subsequent Posting of FI Documents 

FMN1 Subsequent Posting of MM Documents 

FMN2 Subsequent Posting of Billing Docs 

FMN3 Transfer Purchase Req. Documents 

FMN4 Transfer Purchase Order Documents 

FMN5 Transfer Funds Reservation Documents 

FMN8 Simulation Lists Debit Position 

FMN8_OLD Simulation Lists Debit Position 

365

FMN9 Posted Debit Position List 

FMN9_OLD Posted Debit Position List 

FMNA Display CBA Rules 

FMNP Maintain CBA Rules 

FMNR Assign SN-BUSTL to CBA 

FMNS Display CBA Rules 

FMNU Maintain CBA Rules 

FMP0 Maintain Financial Budget 

FMP1 Display Financial Budget 

FMP2 Delete Financial Budget Version 

FMR0 Reconstruct Parked Documents 

FMR1 Actual/Commitment Report 

FMR2 Actual/Commitment per Company Code 

FMR3 Plan/Actual/Commitment Report 

FMR4 Plan/Commitment Report w.Hierarchy 

FMR5A 12 Period Forecast: Actual and Plan 

FMR6A Three Period Display: Plan/Actual 

FMRA Access Report Tree 

FMRB Access Report Tree 

FMRE_ARCH Archive Earmarked Funds 

FMRE_EWU01 Earmarked Funds: Euro Preprocessing 

FMRE_EWU02 Earmarked Funds: Euro Post processing 

FMRE_SERLK Close Earmarked Funds 

FMRP18 Clear Subsequent Postings 

366

FMSS Display Status Assignment 

FMSU Change Assigned Status 

FMU0 Display Funds Reservation Doc.Types 

FMU1 Maintain Funds Reservation Doc.Types 

FMU2 Display Funds Reservtn Fld Variants 

FMU3 Maintain Funds Resvtn Field Variants 

FMU4 Display Funds Reservation Fld Groups 

FMU5 Maintain Funds Reservatn Fld Groups 

FMU6 Display Funds Reservtn Field Selctn 

FMU7 Maintain Funds Resvtn Field Selection 

FMU8 Display Template Type for Fds Resvtn 

FMU9 Maintain Template Type for Fds Resvn 

FMUA Display Fds Res.Template Type Fields 

FMUB Maintain Fds Res.Template Type Fields 

FMUC Display Funds Res. Reference Type 

FMUD Maintain Funds Res.Reference Type 

FMUE Display Funds Res.Ref.Type Fields 

FMUF Maintain Fds Rsvtn Ref.Type Fields 

FMUG Display Reasons for Decision 

FMUH Maintain Reasons for Decisions 

FMUI Display Groups for Workflow Fields 

FMUJ Maintain Groups for Workflow Fields 

FMUK Display Fields in Groups for WF 

FMUL Maintain Fields in Groups for WF 

367

FMUM Display Field Select -->Variant/Group 

FMUN Display Field Seln-->Variant/Group 

FMUV Funds Resvtn Field Status Var.Asst 

FMV1 Create Forecast of Revenue 

FMV2 Change Forecast of Revenue 

FMV3 Display Forecast of Revenue 

FMV4 Approve Forecast of Revenue 

FMV5 Change FM Acct Asst in Fcst of Rev. 

FMV6 Reduce Forecast of Revenue Manually 

FMVI Create Summarization Item 

FMVO Fund Balance Carry forward 

FMVS Display Summarization Item 

FMVT Carry Forward Fund Balance 

FMVU Change Summarization Item 

FMW1 Create Funds Blocking 

FMW2 Change Funds Blocking 

FMW3 Display Funds Blocking 

FMW4 Approve Funds Blocking 

FMW5 Change FM Acct Asst in Funds Blkg 

FMWA Create Funds Transfer 

FMWAZ Payment Transfer 

FMWB Change Funds Transfer 

FMWC Display Funds Transfer 

FMWD Approve Funds Transfer 

368

FMWE Change FM Acct Asst in Funds Trsfr 

FMX1 Create Funds Reservation 

FMX2 Change Funds Reservation 

FMX3 Display Funds Reservation 

FMX4 Approve Funds Reservation 

FMX5 Change FM Acct Asst in Funds Resvn 

FMX6 Funds Reservation: Manual Reduction 

FMY1 Create Funds Commit ment 

FMY2 Change Funds Commitment 

FMY3 Display Funds Pre commitment 

FMY4 Approve Funds Pre commit ment 

FMY5 Change FM Acct Asst in Funds Prcmmt 

FMY6 Reduce Funds Pre commitment manually 

FMZ1 Create Funds Commitment 

FMZ2 Change Funds Commitment 

FMZ3 Display Funds Commitment 

FMZ4 Approve Funds Commitment 

FMZ5 Change FM Acct Asst in Funds Commt 

FMZ6 Reduce Funds Commitment Manually 

FMZBVT Carry Forward Balance 

FMZZ Revalue Funds Commitments 

FM_DL07 Delete Work list 

FM_DLFI Deletes FI Documents Transferred from 

FM_DLFM Deletes all FM Data (fast) 

369

FM_DLOI Deletes Cmmts Transferred from FM 

FM_EURO_M Parameter maintenance for euro conv. 

FM_RC06 Reconcile FI Paymts--> FM Totals Items 

FM_RC07 Reconcile FI Paymts--> FM Line Items 

FM_RC08 Reconcile FM Paymts --> FM Line Items 

FM_RC11 Select Old Payments 

FM_S123 GR/IR: Post OIs to FM Again 

FM_S201 Post Payments on Account to FIFM 

FM_SD07 Display Work list 

FN-1 No. range: FVVD_RANL (Loan number) 

FN-4 Number range maintenance: FVVD_PNNR 

FN-5 Number range maintenance: FVVD_SNBNR 

FN-6 Number range maintenance: FVVD_RPNR 

FN09 Create Borrower's Note Order 

FN11 Change borrower's note order 

FN12 Display borrower's note order 

FN13 Delete borrower's note order 

FN15 Create borrower's note contract 

FN16 Change borrower's note contract 

FN17 Display borrower's note contract 

FN18 Payoff borrower's note contract 

FN19 Reverse borrower's note contract 

FN1A Create other loan contract 

FN1V Create other loan contract 

370

FN20 Create borrower's note offer 

FN21 Change borrower's note offer 

FN22 Display borrower's note offer 

FN23 Delete borrower's note offer 

FN24 Activate borrower's note offer 

FN2A Change other loan application 

FN2V Change other loan contract 

FN30 Create policy interested party 

FN31 Change policy interested party 

FN32 Display policy interested party 

FN33 Delete policy interested party 

FN34 Policy interested party in applic. 

FN35 Policy interested party in contract 

FN37 Loan Reversal Chain 

FN3A Display other loan application 

FN3V Display other loan contract 

FN40 Create other loan interested party 

FN41 Change other loan interested party 

FN42 Display other loan interested party 

FN43 Delete other loan interested party 

FN44 Other loan interest. Party in applic. 

FN45 Other loan interested prty in cntrct 

FN4A Delete other loan application 

FN4V Delete other loan contract 

371

FN5A Other loan application in contract 

FN5V Payoff other loan contract 

FN61 Create collateral value 

FN62 Change collateral value 

FN63 Display collateral value 

FN70 List 25 

FN72 List 54 

FN80 Enter manual debit position 

FN81 Change manual debit position 

FN82 Display manual debit position 

FN83 Create waiver 

FN84 Change waiver 

FN85 Display waiver 

FN86 Enter debit position depreciation 

FN87 Change debit position depreciation 

FN88 Display debit position depreciation 

FN8A Manual Entry: Unsched. Repayment 

FN8B Manual Entry: Other Bus. Operations 

FN8C Manual Entry: Charges 

FN8D Post Planned Records 

FNA0 Policy application in contract 

FNA1 Create mortgage application 

FNA2 Change mortgage application 

FNA3 Display mortgage application 

372

FNA4 Complete mortgage application 

FNA5 Mortgage application in contract 

FNA6 Create policy application 

FNA7 Change policy application 

FNA8 Display policy application 

FNA9 Delete policy application 

FNAA Reactivate deleted mortgage applic. 

FNAB Reactivate deleted mortg. int.party 

FNAC Reactivate deleted mortgage contract 

FNAD Reactivate deleted policy applicat. 

FNAE Reactivate deleted policy contract 

FNAG Reactivate deleted other loan applic 

FNAH Reactivate del. other loan int.party 

FNAI Reactivate deleted other loan cntrct 

FNAK Select file character 

FNAL Reactivate deleted BNL contract 

FNAM Reactivate deleted policy contract 

FNASL Loans: Account Analysis 

FNB1 Transfer to a Loan 

FNB2 Transfer from a Loan 

FNB3 Document Reversal - Loans 

FNB8 BAV Information 

FNB9 BAV transfer 

FNBD Loans-Automatic bal. sheet transfer 

373

FNBG Guarantee charges list 

FNBU DARWIN- Loans accounting menu 

FNCD Transfer Customizing for Dunning 

FNCW1 Maintain Standard Role 

FNCW2 Transaction Release: Adjust Workflow 

FNDD Convert Dunning Data in Dunn. History 

FNEN Create Loan 

FNENALG Create General Loan 

FNENHYP Create Mortgage Loan 

FNENPOL Create Policy Loan 

FNENSSD Create Borrower's Note Loan 

FNF1 Rollover: Create file 

FNF2 Rollover: Change file 

FNF3 Rollover: Display file 

FNF4 Rollover: Fill file 

FNF9 Rollover: Evaluations 

FNFO ISIS: Create file 

FNFP ISIS: Change file 

FNFQ ISIS: Display file 

FNFR ISIS: Fill file 

FNFT Rollover: File evaluation 

FNFU Rollover: Update file 

FNG2 Total Loan Commitment 

FNG3 Total Commitment 

374

FNI1 Create mortgage application 

FNI2 Change mortgage application 

FNI3 Display mortgage application 

FNI4 Delete mortgage application 

FNI5 Mortgage application to offer 

FNI6 Mortgage application in contract 

FNIA Create interested party 

FNIB Change interested party 

FNIC Display interested party 

FNID Delete interested party 

FNIE Reactivate interested party 

FNIH Decision-making 

FNIJ Create credit standing 

FNIK Change credit standing 

FNIL Display credit standing 

FNIN Create collateral value 

FNIO Change collateral value 

FNIP Display collateral value 

FNK0 Multimillion Loan Display (GBA14) 

FNK1 Loans to Managers (GBA15) 

FNKO Cond.types - Cond.groups allocation 

FNL1 Rollover: Create Main File 

FNL2 Rollover: Change Main File 

FNL3 Rollover: Displ. Main File Structure 

375

FNL4 New business 



FNM1 Automatic Posting 

FNM1S Automatic Posting - Single 

FNM2 Balance sheet transfer 

FNM3 Loans reversal module 

FNM4 Undisclosed assignment 

FNM5 Automatic debit position simulation 

FNM6 Post dunning charges/int.on arrears 

FNM7 Loan reversal chain 

FNMA Partner data: Settings menu 

FNMD Submenu General Loans 

FNME Loans management menu 

FNMEC Loans Management Menu 

FNMH Loans management menu 

FNMI Loans information system 

FNMO Loans Menu Policy Loans 

FNMP Rollover 

FNMS Loans Menu Borrower's Notes 

FNN4 Display general file 

FNN5 Edit general file 

FNN6 Display general main file 

FNN7 Edit general main file 

376

FNN8 Display general main file 

FNN9 Edit general overall file 

FNO1 Create Object 

FNO2 Change Object 

FNO3 Display Object 

FNO5 Create collateral 

FNO6 Change collateral 

FNO7 Display collateral 

FNO8 Create Objects from File 

FNO9 Create Collateral from File 

FNP0 Edit rollover manually 

FNP4 Rollover: Display file 

FNP5 Rollover: Edit File 

FNP6 Rollover: Display main file 

FNP7 Rollover: Edit main file 

FNP8 Rollover: Display overall file 

FNP9 Rollover: Edit overall file 

FNQ2 New Business Statistics 

FNQ3 Post processing IP rejection 

FNQ4 Customer Inc. Payment Post processing 

FNQ5 Transact. Type - Acct determination. 

FNQ6 Compare Flow Type/Account Determine. 

FNQ7 Generate flow type 

FNQ8 Automatic Clearing for Overpayments 

377

FNQ9 Int. adjustment runs 

FNQF Swiss interest adjustment runs 

FNQG Swiss special interest runs 

FNR0 Loans: Posting Journal 

FNR6 Insur.prtfolio trends - NEW 

FNR7 Totals and Balance List 

FNR8 Account statement 

FNR9 Planning list 

FNRA Other accruals/deferrals 

FNRB Memo record update 

FNRC Accruals/deferrals reset 

FNRD Display incoming payments 

FNRE Reverse incoming payments 

FNRI Portfolio Analysis Discount/Premium 

FNRS Reversal Accrual/Deferral 

FNS1 Collateral number range 

FNS4 Cust. list parameters for loan order 

FNS6 Installation parameter lists 

FNS7 Loan Portfolio Trend Customizing 

FNSA Foreign currency valuation 

FNSB Master data summary 

FNSL Balance reconciliation list 

FNT0 Loan correspondence (Switzerland) 

FNT1 Autom. deadline monitoring 

378

FNT2 Copy text modules to client 

FNUB Treasury transfer 

FNV0 Payoff policy contract 

FNV1 Create mortgage contract 

FNV2 Change mortgage contract 

FNV3 Display mortgage contract 

FNV4 Delete mortgage contract 

FNV5 Payoff mortgage contract 

FNV6 Create policy contract 

FNV7 Change policy contract 

FNV8 Display policy contract 

FNV9 Delete policy contract 

FNVA Create paid off contracts 

FNVCOMPRESSION Loans: Document Data Summarization 

FNVD Disburse Contract 

FNVI Loans: General Overview 

FNVM Change Contract 

FNVR Reactivate Contract 

FNVS Display Contract 

FNVW Waive Contract 

FNWF WF Loans Release: List of Work Items 

FNWF_REP Release Workflow: Synchronization 

FNWO Loans: Fast Processing 

FNWS Housing statistics 

379

FNX1 Rollover: Create Table 

FNX2 Rollover: Change Table 

FNX3 Rollover: Display Table 

FNX6 Rollover: Delete Table 

FNX7 Rollover: Deactivate Table 

FNX8 Rollover: Print Table 

FNXD TR-EDT: Documentation 

FNXG List of Bus. Partners Transferred 

FNXU List of Imported Loans 

FNY1 New Business: Create Table 

FNY2 New Business: Change Table 

FNY3 New Business: Display Table 

FNY6 New Business: Delete Table 

FNY7 New Business: Deactivate Table 

FNY8 New Business: Print Table 

FNZ0 Rejections report 

FNZ1 Postprocessing payment transactions 

FNZA Account Determination Customizing 

FN_1 Table maint. transferred loans 

FN_2 Table maintenance transf. partner 

FN_UPD_FELDAUSW Update Program for Field Selection 

Tcodes for Configuring Assets Accounting 

S.No TCODE PARTICULARS 

1 EC08 COPY CHART OF DEPRECIATION 

380

2 FTXP CREATION OF 0% TAX CODES 

3 OBCL ASSIGN TAX CODES FOR NON-TAXABLE TRANSACTIONS 

4 OAOB ASSIGN CHART OF DEP. TO COMPANY CODE 

5 SPECIFY ACCOUNT DETERMINATION 

6 CREATE SCREEN LAYOUT RULES 

7 OAOA DEFINE ASSET CLASSES 

8 AS08 DEFINE NUMBER RANGES FOR MASTER CLASSES 

9 AO90 INTEGRATION WITH GL 

10 OAYZ DETERMINE DEPRECIATION AREAS IN ASSET CLASSES 

11 DEFINE SCREEN LAYOUT FOR ASSET MASTER DATA 

12 AO21 DEFINE SCREEN LAYOURS FOR ASSET DEP. AREAS 

13 FBN1 DEFINE NUMBER RANGES FOR DEP. POSTINGS 

14 OAYR SPECIFY INTERVALS AND POSTING RULES 

15 OAYO SPECIFY ROUND UP NET BOOK VALUATION 

16 DEPRECIATION KEYS 

17 DEFINE BASE METHOD 

18 AFAMD DEFINE DECLINING BALANCE METHODS 

19 AFAMS DEFINE MULTI LEVEL METHODS 

20 AFAMP DEFINE PERIOD CONTROL METHODS 

21 AFAMA DEFINE DEPRECIATION KEY 

22 AS01 ASSET MASTER CREATION 

23 AS11 CREATION OF SUB-ASSET 

24 F-90 ASSET PURCHASE POSTING 

25 AW01 ASSET EXPLORER 

381

26 AFAB DEPRECIATION RUN 

27 F-92 SALE OF ASSET 

28 ABUMN TRANSFER OF ASSET 

29 ABAVN SCRAPPING OF ASSET 

382

sap finance.pdf - Ameerpet Pages

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?